OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [tags/] [gdb/] [gdb-6.8/] [gdb-6.8.openrisc-2.1/] [gdb/] [doc/] [gdbint.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 33

Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 24 jeremybenn
\input texinfo   @c -*- texinfo -*-
2
@setfilename gdbint.info
3
@include gdb-cfg.texi
4
@dircategory Software development
5
@direntry
6
* Gdb-Internals: (gdbint).      The GNU debugger's internals.
7
@end direntry
8
 
9
@ifinfo
10
This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11
Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12
   2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13
   Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14
Contributed by Cygnus Solutions.  Written by John Gilmore.
15
Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
 
17
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22
Free Documentation License''.
23
@end ifinfo
24
 
25
@setchapternewpage off
26
@settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
 
28
@syncodeindex fn cp
29
@syncodeindex vr cp
30
 
31
@titlepage
32
@title @value{GDBN} Internals
33
@subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34
@author John Gilmore
35
@author Cygnus Solutions
36
@author Second Edition:
37
@author Stan Shebs
38
@author Cygnus Solutions
39
@page
40
@tex
41
\def\$#1${{#1}}  % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42
\xdef\manvers{\$Revision$}  % For use in headers, footers too
43
{\parskip=0pt
44
\hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45
\hfill \manvers\par
46
\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47
}
48
@end tex
49
 
50
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51
Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52
   2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
 
54
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59
Free Documentation License''.
60
@end titlepage
61
 
62
@contents
63
 
64
@node Top
65
@c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66
@c not for TeX).  Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67
@top Scope of this Document
68
 
69
This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}.  It
70
includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71
as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
 
73
@menu
74
* Requirements::
75
* Overall Structure::
76
* Algorithms::
77
* User Interface::
78
* libgdb::
79
* Symbol Handling::
80
* Language Support::
81
* Host Definition::
82
* Target Architecture Definition::
83
* Target Descriptions::
84
* Target Vector Definition::
85
* Native Debugging::
86
* Support Libraries::
87
* Coding::
88
* Porting GDB::
89
* Versions and Branches::
90
* Start of New Year Procedure::
91
* Releasing GDB::
92
* Testsuite::
93
* Hints::
94
 
95
* GDB Observers::  @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
96
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
97
* Index::
98
@end menu
99
 
100
@node Requirements
101
 
102
@chapter Requirements
103
@cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
104
 
105
Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
106
requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}.  Although some
107
of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
108
that have run counter to these requirements.
109
 
110
First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger.  It's not designed to be a
111
front panel for embedded systems.  It's not a text editor.  It's not a
112
shell.  It's not a programming environment.
113
 
114
@value{GDBN} is an interactive tool.  Although a batch mode is
115
available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
116
programmer.
117
 
118
@value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user.  A programmer hot on
119
the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
120
going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
121
to debugger commands.
122
 
123
@value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
124
While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
125
picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
126
programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
127
mollify the debugger.
128
 
129
@value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
130
Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
131
heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
132
 
133
@value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere.  No other debugger is
134
available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
135
supports.
136
 
137
 
138
@node Overall Structure
139
 
140
@chapter Overall Structure
141
 
142
@value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
143
symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
144
@dfn{target side}).
145
 
146
The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
147
supporting code.
148
 
149
The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
150
interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
151
parsing, type and value printing.
152
 
153
The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
154
physical target manipulation.
155
 
156
The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
157
number of exceptions.  For instance, core file support involves symbolic
158
elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
159
supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers).  Instead,
160
this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
161
should fit together.
162
 
163
@section The Symbol Side
164
 
165
The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
166
you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
167
For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
168
many kinds of expressions.
169
 
170
@section The Target Side
171
 
172
The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
173
Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
174
of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
175
available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
176
 
177
Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
178
display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all.  In some cases,
179
such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
180
relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
181
way.
182
 
183
@section Configurations
184
 
185
@cindex host
186
@cindex target
187
@dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
188
@dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
189
executes.  In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
190
third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
191
 
192
Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
193
Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
194
float format.
195
 
196
Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
197
dependent.  Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
198
breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
199
to call a function.
200
 
201
Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
202
is native dependent.  One example is Unix child process support; if the
203
host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
204
process is a bad idea.  The various macros needed for finding the
205
registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
206
in the native-dependent files.
207
 
208
Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
209
are really part of the target environment, but which require
210
@code{#include} files that are only available on the host system.  Core
211
file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
212
 
213
When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
214
have to include all three kinds of information.
215
 
216
@section Source Tree Structure
217
@cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
218
 
219
The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
220
are only a few subdirectories.  A file's name usually gives a hint as
221
to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
222
@file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
223
 
224
Files that are related to some common task have names that share
225
common substrings.  For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
226
debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
227
reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
228
deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
229
parlance for the program being debugged).
230
 
231
There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
232
@samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
233
files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
234
(sparc, mips, etc).  Usually, only one of these will be used in a
235
specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
236
 
237
Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
238
debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
239
native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
240
 
241
The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
242
 
243
@table @file
244
@item cli
245
Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
246
Interpreter.  @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
247
 
248
@item gdbserver
249
Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
250
 
251
@item gdbtk
252
Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
253
 
254
@item mi
255
The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
256
 
257
@item signals
258
Target signal translation code.
259
 
260
@item tui
261
Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
262
Interface.  @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
263
@end table
264
 
265
@node Algorithms
266
 
267
@chapter Algorithms
268
@cindex algorithms
269
 
270
@value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms.  They are
271
often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
272
cases and real-world issues.  This chapter describes the basic
273
algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
274
they use.
275
 
276
@section Frames
277
 
278
@cindex frame
279
@cindex call stack frame
280
A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
281
and called functions.
282
 
283
@cindex frame, unwind
284
@value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
285
need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind.  In fact,
286
the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
287
Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
288
read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
289
 
290
@findex frame_register_unwind
291
@findex get_frame_register
292
@value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
293
``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame.  That is,
294
@samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
295
frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
296
#0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame).  But then the
297
obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
298
frame itself?
299
 
300
@cindex sentinel frame
301
@findex get_frame_type
302
@vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
303
To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
304
``-1st'' frame.  Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
305
the current values of the youngest real frame's registers.  If @var{f}
306
is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
307
SENTINEL_FRAME}.
308
 
309
@section Prologue Analysis
310
 
311
@cindex prologue analysis
312
@cindex call frame information
313
@cindex CFI (call frame information)
314
To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
315
variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
316
of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
317
saved.  Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
318
younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
319
scattered unpredictably across younger frames.  This means that
320
changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
321
may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
322
 
323
Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
324
which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
325
But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
326
technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
327
registers.  A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
328
code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
329
allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
330
register, save registers, and so on.  Obviously, this can't be done
331
accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
332
helpful.  Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
333
CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
334
@value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
335
calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
336
 
337
In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
338
target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
339
optimizers.  Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
340
write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
341
understand all the prologues GCC would generate.  However, over time
342
GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
343
understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
344
themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
345
and fragile.  Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
346
instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
347
 
348
@cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
349
@cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
350
@cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
351
To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
352
and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
353
prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
354
analyzers.  When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
355
framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
356
``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
357
using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
358
would hold when the code actually runs.  For example, if our function
359
starts with the instruction:
360
 
361
@example
362
addi r1, 42     # add 42 to r1
363
@end example
364
@noindent
365
we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
366
this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
367
value.
368
 
369
If we then see an instruction like:
370
 
371
@example
372
addi r1, 22     # add 22 to r1
373
@end example
374
@noindent
375
we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
376
it is now 64 greater than its original value.
377
 
378
If the next instruction were:
379
 
380
@example
381
mov r2, r1      # set r2 to r1's value
382
@end example
383
@noindent
384
then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
385
@code{r1} plus 64.
386
 
387
It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
388
need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
389
registers.  So after an instruction like this:
390
 
391
@example
392
mov (fp+4), r2
393
@end example
394
@noindent
395
then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
396
holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
397
 
398
And so on.
399
 
400
Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable.  If we
401
wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
402
the instruction:
403
 
404
@example
405
xor r1, r3      # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
406
@end example
407
@noindent
408
then things would get pretty complex.  But remember, we're just doing
409
a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
410
relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
411
``unknown''.  We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
412
information is acceptable for our application.
413
 
414
So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
415
approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
416
never inaccurate.
417
 
418
Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
419
machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
420
contents of registers and memory instead of actual values.  Starting
421
from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
422
current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
423
Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
424
kept track of.
425
 
426
@itemize @bullet
427
 
428
@item
429
To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
430
stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
431
minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
432
If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
433
the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
434
we don't know the frame size.
435
 
436
@item
437
To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
438
search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
439
registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
440
original value.  If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
441
to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
442
anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
443
@end itemize
444
 
445
This does take some work.  But prologue analyzers aren't
446
quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
447
forms any more; they're big, hairy functions.  Along with inferior
448
function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
449
of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port.  So it's
450
worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
451
and maintain.  In the approach described above:
452
 
453
@itemize @bullet
454
 
455
@item
456
It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
457
whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
458
the effect of each instruction.
459
 
460
@item
461
It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
462
instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
463
wasn't already broken before.
464
 
465
@item
466
It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
467
complicate the code for each instruction.  As long as your domain
468
of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
469
what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
470
already gathering the right data for you.
471
 
472
@end itemize
473
 
474
The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
475
the framework and how to use it.
476
 
477
 
478
@section Breakpoint Handling
479
 
480
@cindex breakpoints
481
In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
482
where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
483
that location.
484
 
485
There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
486
breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
487
 
488
@cindex hardware breakpoints
489
@cindex program counter
490
Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
491
features with some chips.  Typically these work by having dedicated
492
register into which the breakpoint address may be stored.  If the PC
493
(shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
494
ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
495
exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
496
 
497
Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
498
include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
499
processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
500
address.
501
 
502
A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
503
breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
504
software breakpoints.  So although these are not literally ``hardware
505
breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
506
@value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
507
for something to happen.
508
 
509
Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
510
limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
511
start trying to set software breakpoints.  (On some architectures,
512
notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
513
whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
514
breakpoints and watchpoints.  On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
515
an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
516
 
517
@cindex software breakpoints
518
Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
519
The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
520
instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
521
that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
522
@value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program.  When the
523
user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
524
instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
525
 
526
Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
527
must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM.  It
528
can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
529
although such a situation would be highly unusual.
530
 
531
Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
532
instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
533
target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
534
breakpoint instruction.  (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
535
larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
536
targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
537
instructions may jumped to.)  Note that it's possible for an instruction
538
set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
539
although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
540
instruction.
541
 
542
@findex BREAKPOINT
543
The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
544
@code{BREAKPOINT}.
545
 
546
Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}.  However,
547
much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
548
 
549
@table @code
550
@cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
551
@findex target_remove_breakpoint
552
@findex target_insert_breakpoint
553
@item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554
@itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
555
Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
556
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
557
non-zero for failure.  On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
558
breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero.  The fields of the
559
@code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
560
to contain other information about the breakpoint on output.  The field
561
@code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
562
related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
563
contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
564
if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
565
underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
566
memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
567
@code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
568
it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
569
 
570
For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
571
shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero.  However,
572
the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
573
@code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
574
used to remove the breakpoint.
575
 
576
@cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
577
@findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
578
@findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
579
@item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580
@itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
581
Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
582
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
583
non-zero for failure.  See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
584
a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
585
@var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
586
@code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
587
but @code{placed_size} may be.
588
@end table
589
 
590
@section Single Stepping
591
 
592
@section Signal Handling
593
 
594
@section Thread Handling
595
 
596
@section Inferior Function Calls
597
 
598
@section Longjmp Support
599
 
600
@cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
601
@value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
602
@code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
603
stepping.  This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
604
which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
605
command.
606
 
607
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
608
To make this work, you need to define a function called
609
@code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
610
structure and extract the longjmp target address.  Since @code{jmp_buf}
611
is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
612
@file{tm-@var{target}.h} file.  Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
613
@file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
614
 
615
@section Watchpoints
616
@cindex watchpoints
617
 
618
Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
619
breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
620
instruction is executed.  When you have data which changes without
621
your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
622
hunt down and kill such bugs.
623
 
624
@cindex hardware watchpoints
625
@cindex software watchpoints
626
Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
627
known as ``software watchpoints.''  @value{GDBN} always uses
628
hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
629
software watchpoints otherwise.  Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
630
will use software watchpoints are:
631
 
632
@itemize @bullet
633
@item
634
The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
635
watchpoint support.  For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
636
to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
637
more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
638
watchpoints.
639
 
640
@item
641
The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
642
registers (as opposed to memory).
643
 
644
@item
645
Too many different watchpoints requested.  (On some architectures,
646
this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
647
resumed.)  Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
648
breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
649
breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
650
 
651
@item
652
No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
653
implementation.
654
@end itemize
655
 
656
Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
657
single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
658
watched expression(s) after each instruction.  The rest of this
659
section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
660
 
661
When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
662
possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
663
It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
664
was hit.  If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
665
 
666
Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
667
once.  This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
668
triggered, if the target can determine it.  If the triggered address
669
is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
670
method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
671
For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
672
every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
673
For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
674
@emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
675
and access watchpoints will never be considered hit.  For data-write
676
watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
677
considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
678
otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints.  For
679
each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
680
the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
681
watched value has changed.  Watchpoints whose watched values have
682
changed are announced as hit.
683
 
684
@value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
685
watchpoints:
686
 
687
@table @code
688
@findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
689
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
690
If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
691
 
692
@findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
693
@item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
694
Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
695
possible to be set.  The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
696
of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
697
not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
698
number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set.  @var{other}
699
is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
700
are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
701
the same time).
702
 
703
@findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
704
@item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
705
Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
706
whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
707
 
708
@cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
709
@findex target_insert_watchpoint
710
@findex target_remove_watchpoint
711
@item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
712
@itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
713
Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
714
@var{len} bytes.  @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
715
possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
716
defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
717
 
718
@smallexample
719
 enum target_hw_bp_type
720
   @{
721
     hw_write   = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
722
     hw_read    = 1, /* Read    HW watchpoint */
723
     hw_access  = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
724
     hw_execute = 3  /* Execute HW breakpoint */
725
   @};
726
@end smallexample
727
 
728
@noindent
729
These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
730
 
731
@findex target_stopped_data_address
732
@item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
733
If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
734
associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
735
@var{addr_p} and return non-zero.  Otherwise, return zero.  This
736
is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints.  It is
737
not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
738
it to improve handling of those also.
739
 
740
@value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
741
immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}.  If the
742
target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
743
resuming, this method should clear it.  For instance, the x86 debug
744
control register has sticky triggered flags.
745
 
746
@findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
747
@item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
748
If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
749
watchpoint to step over it.    Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
750
this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
751
which will perform an interesting read or write.  It should be
752
set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
753
to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
754
watchpoint exception again.
755
 
756
@findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
757
@item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
758
If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
759
watchpoint to step the inferior over it.  This is usually set when
760
watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
761
interesting read or write.
762
 
763
@findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
764
@item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
765
If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
766
inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.  This is usually set
767
when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
768
read or write.
769
 
770
@findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
771
@item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
772
If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
773
watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
774
 
775
@findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
776
@item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
777
Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint.  @var{wait_status} is of
778
the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
779
Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
780
the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
781
type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
782
target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
783
the @var{wait_status} argument.
784
 
785
@value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
786
@code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
787
determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
788
it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
789
@end table
790
 
791
@subsection Watchpoints and Threads
792
@cindex watchpoints, with threads
793
 
794
@value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
795
in all threads.  @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
796
act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
797
watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread.  Therefore, even
798
if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
799
watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
800
per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value.  On
801
@sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
802
@code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
803
@code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
804
@code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
805
threads.
806
 
807
@value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
808
at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
809
multi-threaded programs.  When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
810
queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
811
is resumed.  This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
812
@code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
813
thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}.  If
814
two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
815
will be called a second time for the second thread.
816
 
817
@subsection x86 Watchpoints
818
@cindex x86 debug registers
819
@cindex watchpoints, on x86
820
 
821
The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
822
registers designed to facilitate debugging.  @value{GDBN} provides a
823
generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
824
support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints.  This
825
subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
826
 
827
To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
828
following:
829
 
830
@itemize @bullet
831
@findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
832
@item
833
Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
834
target-dependent headers.
835
 
836
@item
837
Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
838
defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
839
 
840
@item
841
Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
842
@code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
843
@code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
844
 
845
@item
846
Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
847
below.  Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
848
which does the real work.
849
@end itemize
850
 
851
The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
852
debug registers.  Values are copied between the mirror images and the
853
real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
854
provide:
855
 
856
@table @code
857
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
858
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
859
Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
860
 
861
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
862
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
863
Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
864
 
865
@findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
866
@item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
867
Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
868
number @var{idx}.
869
 
870
@findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
871
@item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
872
Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register.  This value is
873
used immediately after it is returned by
874
@code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
875
register values.
876
@end table
877
 
878
For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
879
that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
880
to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints.  This
881
allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
882
expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
883
wasting debug registers which are in short supply.  @value{GDBN}
884
maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
885
anything to use this feature.
886
 
887
The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
888
bytes long.  The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
889
be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
890
region on 4-byte boundary.  However, the x86 watchpoint support in
891
@value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
892
bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
893
a single region.  This allocation of several registers per a watched
894
region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
895
 
896
The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
897
@value{GDBN}'s application code:
898
 
899
@table @code
900
@findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
901
@item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
902
The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
903
this function.  It counts the number of debug registers required to
904
watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
905
less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
906
processors.
907
 
908
@findex i386_stopped_data_address
909
@item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
910
The target function
911
@code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
912
This
913
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
914
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
915
macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
916
set in DR6.
917
 
918
@findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
919
@item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
920
The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
921
is set to call this function.  The
922
argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored.  This
923
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
924
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
925
macro, and returns true if any bit is set.  Otherwise, false is
926
returned.
927
 
928
@findex i386_insert_watchpoint
929
@findex i386_remove_watchpoint
930
@item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
931
@itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
932
Insert or remove a watchpoint.  The macros
933
@code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
934
are set to call these functions.  @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
935
looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
936
region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
937
reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
938
register sharing between watchpoints.  If no such register is found,
939
the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
940
value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
941
register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
942
and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
943
inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
944
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If more than one debug register is
945
required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
946
each debug register.
947
 
948
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
949
in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
950
length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
951
values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
952
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If a register is shared by several
953
watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
954
decrements the reference count, and only calls
955
@code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
956
the count goes to zero.
957
 
958
@findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
959
@findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
960
@item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
961
@itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
962
These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints.  The
963
macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
964
@code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
965
The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
966
the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
967
These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
968
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
969
the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
970
hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
971
register.
972
 
973
@findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
974
@item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
975
This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
976
hardware breakpoint that triggered.  It works like
977
@code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
978
address whose watchpoint triggered.
979
 
980
@findex i386_cleanup_dregs
981
@item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
982
This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
983
bits in the mirror images of the debug registers.  It doesn't affect
984
the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
985
@end table
986
 
987
@noindent
988
@strong{Notes:}
989
@enumerate 1
990
@item
991
x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
992
However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
993
@code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
994
watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
995
on x86.
996
 
997
@item
998
x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
999
only, or globally, for all the tasks.  For each debug register,
1000
there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1001
whether the associated address is watched locally or globally.  The
1002
current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1003
always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1004
watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1005
unavailable in many platforms.
1006
@end enumerate
1007
 
1008
@section Checkpoints
1009
@cindex checkpoints
1010
@cindex restart
1011
In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1012
the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1013
 
1014
Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1015
whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1016
state at a later time.  This can be expected to include the state of
1017
registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1018
of open files and devices.
1019
 
1020
There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1021
in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1022
method implemented on the target side.
1023
 
1024
A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1025
state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1026
not typically include information about external entities such as
1027
open files.  Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1028
 
1029
A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1030
as well as some subset of external (kernel) state.  This method
1031
is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1032
be used on other systems.
1033
 
1034
Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1035
method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1036
advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1037
details of how it is done.
1038
 
1039
 
1040
@section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1041
@cindex observer pattern interface
1042
@cindex notifications about changes in internals
1043
 
1044
In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1045
some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals.  Traditionally, these
1046
modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1047
hooks and gdb-events.  Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1048
versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1049
@value{GDBN}.  The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1050
a strong limitation.
1051
 
1052
A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1053
Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented.  The goal was to provide
1054
a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1055
previously available.  This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1056
easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1057
interface when adding new notifications.
1058
 
1059
See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1060
currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1061
implementation is also briefly discussed.
1062
 
1063
@node User Interface
1064
 
1065
@chapter User Interface
1066
 
1067
@value{GDBN} has several user interfaces.  Although the command-line interface
1068
is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1069
 
1070
@section Command Interpreter
1071
 
1072
@cindex command interpreter
1073
@cindex CLI
1074
The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple.  It is designed to
1075
allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1076
has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1077
a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1078
 
1079
For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1080
@code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1081
to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1082
 
1083
@findex add_cmd
1084
@findex add_com
1085
To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}.  @code{add_com} adds to
1086
the main command list, and should be used for those commands.  The usual
1087
place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1088
the ends of most source files.
1089
 
1090
@findex add_setshow_cmd
1091
@findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1092
To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1093
@code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}.  The former is
1094
a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1095
further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1096
the new command structures for manipulation.
1097
 
1098
@cindex deprecating commands
1099
@findex deprecate_cmd
1100
Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1101
deprecate them for some time.  Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1102
aliases to set the deprecated flag.  @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1103
@code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument.  You can use the
1104
return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1105
command immediately after it is created.
1106
 
1107
The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1108
replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1109
@code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1110
entire string the user should type at the command line.
1111
 
1112
@section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1113
@c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1114
@c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1115
 
1116
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1117
The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1118
@value{GDBN} output code.  They hide the specifics of different user
1119
interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1120
from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1121
every UI, to produce output.
1122
 
1123
@subsection Overview and Terminology
1124
 
1125
In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1126
of output, and can even generate an input request.
1127
 
1128
Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1129
 
1130
@itemize @bullet
1131
@item
1132
to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1133
 
1134
@item
1135
to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1136
operation;
1137
 
1138
@item
1139
to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1140
progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1141
 
1142
@item
1143
to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1144
 
1145
@item
1146
to show @emph{debug data};
1147
 
1148
@item
1149
to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1150
@end itemize
1151
 
1152
@noindent
1153
This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1154
although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1155
 
1156
Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1157
involves one or more of the following:
1158
 
1159
@itemize @bullet
1160
@item
1161
output of the actual data
1162
 
1163
@item
1164
formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1165
easily readable by humans
1166
 
1167
@item
1168
machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1169
parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1170
 
1171
@item
1172
annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1173
parts in the output
1174
@end itemize
1175
 
1176
The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1177
Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines.  Note that use
1178
of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1179
deprecated.
1180
 
1181
Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1182
a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1183
non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1184
header and a body.  In a BNF-like form:
1185
 
1186
@table @code
1187
@item <table> @expansion{}
1188
@code{<header> <body>}
1189
@item <header> @expansion{}
1190
@code{@{ <column> @}}
1191
@item <column> @expansion{}
1192
@code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1193
@item <body> @expansion{}
1194
@code{@{<row>@}}
1195
@end table
1196
 
1197
 
1198
@subsection General Conventions
1199
 
1200
Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1201
@code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1202
object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1203
 
1204
The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1205
to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1206
 
1207
The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1208
When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1209
sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1210
format.
1211
 
1212
When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1213
call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1214
 
1215
 
1216
@subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1217
 
1218
@cindex list output functions
1219
@cindex table output functions
1220
@cindex tuple output functions
1221
This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1222
tuples and tables.  The routines to output the actual data items
1223
(fields) are presented in the next section.
1224
 
1225
To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1226
containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1227
fields where each field describes an identical object.
1228
 
1229
Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1230
rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading.  Use this
1231
even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1232
 
1233
@cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1234
Tables can not be nested.  Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1235
maximum of five levels.
1236
 
1237
The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1238
 
1239
@smallexample
1240
  ui_out_table_begin
1241
    ui_out_table_header
1242
    @dots{}
1243
    ui_out_table_body
1244
      ui_out_tuple_begin
1245
        ui_out_field_*
1246
        @dots{}
1247
      ui_out_tuple_end
1248
      @dots{}
1249
  ui_out_table_end
1250
@end smallexample
1251
 
1252
Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1253
functions:
1254
 
1255
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1256
The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1257
of a table.  It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1258
function for a given table.  @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1259
the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1260
@var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table.  The string
1261
pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1262
@code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1263
was @code{malloc}ed.
1264
 
1265
The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1266
the end of the table's output.
1267
@end deftypefun
1268
 
1269
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1270
@code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1271
table column.  You call this function several times, one each for every
1272
column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1273
@code{ui_out_table_body}.
1274
 
1275
The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters.  The
1276
value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1277
@code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1278
center, or right-justify it.  @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1279
specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1280
column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1281
call.
1282
@end deftypefun
1283
 
1284
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1285
This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1286
@end deftypefun
1287
 
1288
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1289
This function signals the end of a table's output.  It should be called
1290
after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1291
functions.
1292
 
1293
There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1294
call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1295
will signal an internal error.
1296
@end deftypefun
1297
 
1298
The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1299
call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1300
@code{ui_out_table_end}.  You build a tuple by calling
1301
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1302
calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1303
 
1304
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1305
This function marks the beginning of a tuple output.  @var{id} points
1306
to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1307
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1308
after the call.
1309
@end deftypefun
1310
 
1311
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1312
This function signals an end of a tuple output.  There should be exactly
1313
one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1314
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1315
be signaled.
1316
@end deftypefun
1317
 
1318
@deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1319
This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1320
(@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.  It provides a convenient
1321
and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1322
cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1323
@smallexample
1324
struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1325
ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1326
old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1327
                            uiout);
1328
@end smallexample
1329
@end deftypefun
1330
 
1331
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1332
This function marks the beginning of a list output.  @var{id} points to
1333
an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1334
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1335
after the call.
1336
@end deftypefun
1337
 
1338
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1339
This function signals an end of a list output.  There should be exactly
1340
one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1341
@code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1342
be signaled.
1343
@end deftypefun
1344
 
1345
@deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1346
Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1347
opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1348
that will close the list.
1349
@end deftypefun
1350
 
1351
@subsection Item Output Functions
1352
 
1353
@cindex item output functions
1354
@cindex field output functions
1355
@cindex data output
1356
The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1357
items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1358
 
1359
Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1360
 
1361
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1362
This is the most general output function.  It produces the
1363
representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1364
according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1365
@code{printf}-like format string.  The optional argument @var{fldname}
1366
supplies the name of the field.  The data items themselves are
1367
supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1368
 
1369
This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1370
use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1371
@end deftypefun
1372
 
1373
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1374
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It uses the
1375
@code{"%d"} output conversion specification.  @var{fldname} specifies
1376
the name of the field.
1377
@end deftypefun
1378
 
1379
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1380
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It differs from
1381
@code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1382
@var{fldname} specifies
1383
the name of the field.
1384
@end deftypefun
1385
 
1386
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1387
This function outputs an address.
1388
@end deftypefun
1389
 
1390
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1391
This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1392
specification.
1393
@end deftypefun
1394
 
1395
Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1396
functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1397
@code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}.  These functions accept an argument of
1398
the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1399
used to store the data stream used for the output.  When you use one
1400
of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1401
@code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions.  To this end,
1402
you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1403
@code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1404
@code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1405
and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1406
constructed.  When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1407
you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1408
@code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1409
 
1410
@deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1411
This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1412
same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1413
passed in @var{uiout}.  It returns a pointer to the newly created
1414
@code{ui_stream} object.
1415
@end deftypefun
1416
 
1417
@deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1418
This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1419
@var{streambuf}.
1420
@end deftypefun
1421
 
1422
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423
This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1424
@code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1425
@code{ui_out_field_string} does.  After a call to
1426
@code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1427
the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1428
@end deftypefun
1429
 
1430
@strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1431
out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1432
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1433
cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources.  Here's a
1434
skeleton code to do that:
1435
 
1436
@smallexample
1437
 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1438
 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1439
 ...
1440
 do_cleanups (old);
1441
@end smallexample
1442
 
1443
If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1444
of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1445
 
1446
@smallexample
1447
  mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1448
  make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1449
@end smallexample
1450
 
1451
Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1452
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1453
same buffer twice.
1454
 
1455
@subsection Utility Output Functions
1456
 
1457
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1458
This function skips a field in a table.  Use it if you have to leave
1459
an empty field without disrupting the table alignment.  The argument
1460
@var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1461
@end deftypefun
1462
 
1463
@deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1464
This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1465
easy to be read by humans.  For example, the console implementation of
1466
this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1467
from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1468
 
1469
Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1470
the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1471
to the table's format.  Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1472
string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1473
output short messages.
1474
@end deftypefun
1475
 
1476
@deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1477
This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces.  It is handy to align the
1478
text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1479
list.
1480
@end deftypefun
1481
 
1482
@deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1483
This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1484
verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}.  The
1485
current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1486
verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1487
setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1488
as zero.  So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1489
argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1490
@end deftypefun
1491
 
1492
@deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1493
This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1494
of where to break lines which are too long.  Ignored for all other
1495
output consumers.  @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1496
be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1497
accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1498
explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions.  If
1499
@var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1500
@end deftypefun
1501
 
1502
@deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1503
This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1504
the UI buffers output.
1505
@end deftypefun
1506
 
1507
 
1508
@subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1509
 
1510
@cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1511
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1512
This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1513
functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1514
@value{GDBN}.  The examples all come from functions defined on the
1515
@file{breakpoints.c} file.
1516
 
1517
This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1518
produce a table.
1519
 
1520
The original code was:
1521
 
1522
@smallexample
1523
 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1524
   @{
1525
     annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1526
 
1527
     annotate_field (0);
1528
     printf_filtered ("Num ");
1529
     annotate_field (1);
1530
     printf_filtered ("Type           ");
1531
     annotate_field (2);
1532
     printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1533
     annotate_field (3);
1534
     printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1535
     if (addressprint)
1536
       @{
1537
         annotate_field (4);
1538
         printf_filtered ("Address    ");
1539
       @}
1540
     annotate_field (5);
1541
     printf_filtered ("What\n");
1542
 
1543
     annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1544
   @}
1545
@end smallexample
1546
 
1547
Here's the new version:
1548
 
1549
@smallexample
1550
  nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1551
 
1552
  if (addressprint)
1553
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1554
  else
1555
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1556
 
1557
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1558
    annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1559
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1560
    annotate_field (0);
1561
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num");             /* 1 */
1562
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563
    annotate_field (1);
1564
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type");             /* 2 */
1565
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1566
    annotate_field (2);
1567
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp");              /* 3 */
1568
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1569
    annotate_field (3);
1570
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb");    /* 4 */
1571
  if (addressprint)
1572
    @{
1573
     if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574
       annotate_field (4);
1575
     if (gdbarch_addr_bit (current_gdbarch) <= 32)
1576
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1577
     else
1578
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1579
    @}
1580
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1581
    annotate_field (5);
1582
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What");  /* 6 */
1583
  ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1584
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1585
    annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1586
@end smallexample
1587
 
1588
This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1589
to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1590
in the above example.  The original code was:
1591
 
1592
@smallexample
1593
   annotate_record ();
1594
   annotate_field (0);
1595
   printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1596
   annotate_field (1);
1597
   if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1598
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1599
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1600
                     (int)b->type);
1601
   printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1602
   annotate_field (2);
1603
   printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1604
   annotate_field (3);
1605
   printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1606
   @dots{}
1607
@end smallexample
1608
 
1609
This is the new version:
1610
 
1611
@smallexample
1612
   annotate_record ();
1613
   ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1614
   annotate_field (0);
1615
   ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1616
   annotate_field (1);
1617
   if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1618
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1619
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1620
                     (int) b->type);
1621
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1622
   annotate_field (2);
1623
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1624
   annotate_field (3);
1625
   ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1626
   @dots{}
1627
@end smallexample
1628
 
1629
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1630
produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1631
functions which requires a stream to be passed.  It also shows how to
1632
automate stream destruction with cleanups.  The original code was:
1633
 
1634
@smallexample
1635
    annotate_field (5);
1636
    print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1637
@end smallexample
1638
 
1639
The new version is:
1640
 
1641
@smallexample
1642
  struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1643
  struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1644
  ...
1645
  annotate_field (5);
1646
  print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1647
  ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1648
@end smallexample
1649
 
1650
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1651
@code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original code
1652
was:
1653
 
1654
@smallexample
1655
  annotate_field (5);
1656
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1657
    printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1658
  else
1659
    printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1660
@end smallexample
1661
 
1662
It became:
1663
 
1664
@smallexample
1665
  annotate_field (5);
1666
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1667
    @{
1668
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1669
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1670
    @}
1671
  else
1672
    @{
1673
      ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1674
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1675
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1676
    @}
1677
@end smallexample
1678
 
1679
The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1680
use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}.  The original
1681
code was:
1682
 
1683
@smallexample
1684
  annotate_field (5);
1685
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1686
    printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1687
@end smallexample
1688
 
1689
It became:
1690
 
1691
@smallexample
1692
  annotate_field (5);
1693
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1694
    @{
1695
      ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1696
      ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1697
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1698
    @}
1699
@end smallexample
1700
 
1701
Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original
1702
code was:
1703
 
1704
@smallexample
1705
  annotate_field (5);
1706
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1707
    printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1708
@end smallexample
1709
 
1710
It became:
1711
 
1712
@smallexample
1713
  annotate_field (5);
1714
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1715
    @{
1716
      ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1717
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1718
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1719
    @}
1720
@end smallexample
1721
 
1722
Finally, here's an example of printing an address.  The original code:
1723
 
1724
@smallexample
1725
  annotate_field (4);
1726
  printf_filtered ("%s ",
1727
        hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1728
@end smallexample
1729
 
1730
It became:
1731
 
1732
@smallexample
1733
  annotate_field (4);
1734
  ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1735
@end smallexample
1736
 
1737
 
1738
@section Console Printing
1739
 
1740
@section TUI
1741
 
1742
@node libgdb
1743
 
1744
@chapter libgdb
1745
 
1746
@section libgdb 1.0
1747
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1748
@code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago.  The theory was
1749
to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1750
 
1751
@section libgdb 2.0
1752
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1753
@code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1754
better able to support graphical and other environments.
1755
 
1756
Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1757
evolving.  The following components have so far been identified:
1758
 
1759
@itemize @bullet
1760
@item
1761
Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1762
@item
1763
Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1764
@item
1765
Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1766
@item
1767
Library - @file{gdb.h}
1768
@end itemize
1769
 
1770
The model that ties these components together is described below.
1771
 
1772
@section The @code{libgdb} Model
1773
 
1774
A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1775
 
1776
@itemize @bullet
1777
@item
1778
As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1779
@code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1780
state, etc).
1781
@item
1782
As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1783
obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1784
@end itemize
1785
 
1786
Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1787
the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1788
controlling @code{libgdb}.  In particular, a client must ensure that
1789
@code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1790
before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1791
 
1792
@section CLI support
1793
 
1794
At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1795
@code{libgdb}.  Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1796
their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1797
requirements.
1798
 
1799
It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1800
(alternate between CLI and client query modes).  The notes below sketch
1801
out the theory:
1802
 
1803
@itemize @bullet
1804
@item
1805
The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1806
@item
1807
The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1808
versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1809
@code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1810
@item
1811
The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1812
used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1813
@end itemize
1814
 
1815
When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1816
along.  Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1817
the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1818
through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1819
At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1820
virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1821
 
1822
The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1823
@code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1824
client's custom builder).
1825
 
1826
@section @code{libgdb} components
1827
 
1828
@subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1829
@file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1830
be used to implement an observer.  At present it only allows for one
1831
observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1832
the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1833
finished the current command.
1834
 
1835
@subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1836
@file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1837
create a builder.  That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1838
when doing any queries.
1839
 
1840
@subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1841
@c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1842
@file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1843
loop.  A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1844
implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1845
 
1846
The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant.  This is so that
1847
@value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1848
instead of returning.
1849
 
1850
@subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1851
@file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system.  It provides
1852
the query interface.  Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1853
builder.  The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1854
before the query function returns.
1855
 
1856
@node Symbol Handling
1857
 
1858
@chapter Symbol Handling
1859
 
1860
Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation.  Symbols include variables,
1861
functions, and types.
1862
 
1863
@section Symbol Reading
1864
 
1865
@cindex symbol reading
1866
@cindex reading of symbols
1867
@cindex symbol files
1868
@value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}.  The usual symbol
1869
file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1870
debugging.  @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1871
symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1872
more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1873
reading symbols from shared libraries.
1874
 
1875
@findex find_sym_fns
1876
Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1877
the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}).  BFD identifies the type
1878
of the file by examining its header.  @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1879
this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1880
 
1881
@findex add_symtab_fns
1882
@cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1883
@cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1884
Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1885
@code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization.  The argument
1886
to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1887
name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1888
and pointers to four functions.  These functions are called at various
1889
times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1890
prefix.
1891
 
1892
The functions supplied by each module are:
1893
 
1894
@table @code
1895
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1896
 
1897
@cindex secondary symbol file
1898
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1899
symbol file.  This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1900
resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1901
read a new symbol file.  Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1902
might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1903
whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1904
 
1905
The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1906
@code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1907
new symbol file being read.  Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1908
and can be modified as desired.  Typically, a struct of private
1909
information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1910
in the @code{private} field.
1911
 
1912
There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1913
@code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1914
 
1915
@item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1916
 
1917
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1918
This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1919
state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1920
@value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}.  It has no
1921
arguments and no result.  It may be called after
1922
@code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1923
may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1924
 
1925
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1926
 
1927
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1928
symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1929
 
1930
@code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1931
@code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization.  @code{addr} is
1932
the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1933
address in memory.  @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1934
table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1935
or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1936
@end table
1937
 
1938
In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1939
@var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1940
to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1941
from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1942
 
1943
@table @code
1944
@item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1945
 
1946
Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1947
the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1948
pointer set.  The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1949
symtab.  Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1950
@code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1951
zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1952
@end table
1953
 
1954
@section Partial Symbol Tables
1955
 
1956
@value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1957
 
1958
@itemize @bullet
1959
@cindex full symbol table
1960
@cindex symtabs
1961
@item
1962
Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}).  These contain the main
1963
information about symbols and addresses.
1964
 
1965
@cindex psymtabs
1966
@item
1967
Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}).  These contain enough
1968
information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1969
symbol table.
1970
 
1971
@cindex minimal symbol table
1972
@cindex minsymtabs
1973
@item
1974
Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}).  These contain information
1975
gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1976
@end itemize
1977
 
1978
@cindex partial symbol table
1979
This section describes partial symbol tables.
1980
 
1981
A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1982
file's debugging information.  Small amounts of information are
1983
extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1984
need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1985
information.  The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1986
quickly.  Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1987
pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1988
the user.
1989
@c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1990
 
1991
The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1992
visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1993
that file.  These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1994
types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1995
 
1996
The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1997
full symbol table would represent.
1998
 
1999
@cindex finding a symbol
2000
@cindex symbol lookup
2001
The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2002
code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2003
 
2004
@itemize @bullet
2005
@findex find_pc_function
2006
@findex find_pc_line
2007
@item
2008
By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2009
function in this file).  The address will be noticed to be in the
2010
range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2011
@code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2012
@code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2013
 
2014
@cindex lookup_symbol
2015
@item
2016
By its name
2017
(e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2018
function).  Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2019
psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in.  Local names will
2020
have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2021
case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2022
qualifier.  Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2023
local scope, in which case the first case applies.  @code{lookup_symbol}
2024
does most of the work here.
2025
@end itemize
2026
 
2027
The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2028
at the right moment.  Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2029
while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it.  Since
2030
psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2031
them anyway.  Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2032
either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2033
name.
2034
 
2035
It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2036
been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2037
in.  Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2038
all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2039
ranges.
2040
 
2041
The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2042
thrown away after the symtab has been read in.  The symtab should always
2043
be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2044
bug-free environment).  Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2045
and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2046
on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2047
unless you want to do a lot more work.
2048
 
2049
@section Types
2050
 
2051
@unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2052
 
2053
@cindex fundamental types
2054
These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally.  Fundamental
2055
types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2056
into one of these.  They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2057
that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2058
knows about.
2059
 
2060
@unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2061
 
2062
@cindex type codes
2063
Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2064
of these types.  The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2065
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2066
which is a pointer to another type.  Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2067
types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2068
other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2069
or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2070
 
2071
@unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2072
 
2073
These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2074
fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2075
use for various ugly historical reasons.  We eventually want to
2076
eliminate these.  Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2077
initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2078
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2079
an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type.  The difference is that the
2080
@code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2081
only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2082
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2083
some particular objfile.
2084
 
2085
@section Object File Formats
2086
@cindex object file formats
2087
 
2088
@subsection a.out
2089
 
2090
@cindex @code{a.out} format
2091
The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix.  It
2092
consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2093
which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2094
respectively.
2095
 
2096
The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2097
place for debugging information.  (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2098
@samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!)  The only debugging
2099
format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2100
symbols with distinctive attributes.
2101
 
2102
The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2103
 
2104
@subsection COFF
2105
 
2106
@cindex COFF format
2107
The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2108
COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header.  The
2109
number of sections is limited.
2110
 
2111
The COFF specification includes support for debugging.  Although this
2112
was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.  For
2113
instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2114
included file.
2115
 
2116
The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2117
 
2118
@subsection ECOFF
2119
 
2120
@cindex ECOFF format
2121
ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2122
workstations.
2123
 
2124
The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2125
 
2126
@subsection XCOFF
2127
 
2128
@cindex XCOFF format
2129
The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2130
The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2131
symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2132
@code{.debug} section (rather than the string table).  For more
2133
information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2134
 
2135
The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2136
shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2137
refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2138
relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable.  At least
2139
using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2140
been run (or the core file has been read).
2141
 
2142
@subsection PE
2143
 
2144
@cindex PE-COFF format
2145
Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2146
executables.  PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2147
 
2148
While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2149
COFF reader.
2150
 
2151
@subsection ELF
2152
 
2153
@cindex ELF format
2154
The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix.  ELF is similar
2155
to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2156
many of COFF's limitations.
2157
 
2158
The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2159
 
2160
@subsection SOM
2161
 
2162
@cindex SOM format
2163
SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2164
SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2165
 
2166
The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2167
 
2168
@section Debugging File Formats
2169
 
2170
This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2171
are independent of the object file format.
2172
 
2173
@subsection stabs
2174
 
2175
@cindex stabs debugging info
2176
@code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2177
format.  Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2178
formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2179
 
2180
While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2181
including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2182
the real work.
2183
 
2184
@subsection COFF
2185
 
2186
@cindex COFF debugging info
2187
The basic COFF definition includes debugging information.  The level
2188
of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2189
 
2190
@subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2191
 
2192
@cindex ECOFF debugging info
2193
ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2194
 
2195
The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2196
 
2197
@subsection DWARF 2
2198
 
2199
@cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2200
DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2201
 
2202
The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2203
 
2204
@subsection SOM
2205
 
2206
@cindex SOM debugging info
2207
Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2208
 
2209
@section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2210
 
2211
@cindex adding debugging info reader
2212
If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2213
there is probably little to be done.
2214
 
2215
If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2216
BFD.  This is beyond the scope of this document.
2217
 
2218
You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2219
debugging symbols.  Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2220
from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2221
information.  As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2222
internal data structures.
2223
 
2224
For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2225
to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2226
platforms have different sizes and layouts.  Specialized routines that
2227
will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2228
directly.  This interface should be described in a file
2229
@file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2230
 
2231
@section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2232
 
2233
Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2234
its @code{objfile_obstack}.  This includes symbols, types,
2235
namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2236
 
2237
Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2238
released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded.  Therefore one
2239
objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2240
they could be unloaded at different times.
2241
 
2242
User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types.  Normally
2243
these types live in the associated objfile.  However, when the objfile
2244
is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2245
the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2246
 
2247
 
2248
@node Language Support
2249
 
2250
@chapter Language Support
2251
 
2252
@cindex language support
2253
@value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2254
although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2255
manually.
2256
 
2257
@value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2258
of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2259
means Fortran, etc.  It may also use a special-purpose language
2260
identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2261
 
2262
@section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2263
 
2264
@cindex adding source language
2265
To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2266
following steps:
2267
 
2268
@table @emph
2269
@item Create the expression parser.
2270
 
2271
@cindex expression parser
2272
This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}.  Routines for
2273
building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2274
@file{parse.c}.
2275
 
2276
@cindex language parser
2277
Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2278
parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2279
@strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2280
various parsers from defining the same global names:
2281
 
2282
@smallexample
2283
#define yyparse         @var{lang}_parse
2284
#define yylex           @var{lang}_lex
2285
#define yyerror         @var{lang}_error
2286
#define yylval          @var{lang}_lval
2287
#define yychar          @var{lang}_char
2288
#define yydebug         @var{lang}_debug
2289
#define yypact          @var{lang}_pact
2290
#define yyr1            @var{lang}_r1
2291
#define yyr2            @var{lang}_r2
2292
#define yydef           @var{lang}_def
2293
#define yychk           @var{lang}_chk
2294
#define yypgo           @var{lang}_pgo
2295
#define yyact           @var{lang}_act
2296
#define yyexca          @var{lang}_exca
2297
#define yyerrflag       @var{lang}_errflag
2298
#define yynerrs         @var{lang}_nerrs
2299
@end smallexample
2300
 
2301
At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2302
initialize it with the right values for your language.  Define an
2303
@code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2304
@samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2305
that your language exists.  You'll need some other supporting variables
2306
and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2307
@code{@var{lang}_language_defn}.  See the declaration of @code{struct
2308
language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2309
for more information.
2310
 
2311
@item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2312
 
2313
@cindex expression evaluation routines
2314
@findex evaluate_subexp
2315
@findex prefixify_subexp
2316
@findex length_of_subexp
2317
If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2318
add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}.  Add support
2319
code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2320
defined in the file @file{eval.c}.  Add cases
2321
for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2322
@code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}.  These compute
2323
the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2324
 
2325
@item Update some existing code
2326
 
2327
Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2328
@code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2329
 
2330
Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2331
These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2332
are language dependent.  If your language does not appear in the switch
2333
statement, an error is reported.
2334
 
2335
@vindex current_language
2336
Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2337
@code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2338
@code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2339
string.
2340
 
2341
@findex _initialize_language
2342
Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2343
language.  This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2344
dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2345
 
2346
@findex allocate_symtab
2347
Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2348
code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2349
This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2350
Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2351
file.  If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2352
information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2353
code.
2354
 
2355
@findex print_subexp
2356
@findex op_print_tab
2357
Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2358
expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}.  Also, add the
2359
printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2360
 
2361
@item Add a place of call
2362
 
2363
@findex parse_exp_1
2364
Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2365
@code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2366
 
2367
@item Use macros to trim code
2368
 
2369
@cindex trimming language-dependent code
2370
The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2371
languages.  If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2372
@var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2373
macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it.  Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2374
leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2375
using your language.
2376
 
2377
Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2378
is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2379
compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2380
 
2381
See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2382
for different languages.
2383
 
2384
@item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2385
 
2386
Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}.  Make sure you update the macro
2387
variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2388
not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2389
distribution!
2390
@end table
2391
 
2392
 
2393
@node Host Definition
2394
 
2395
@chapter Host Definition
2396
 
2397
With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2398
definition machinery anymore.  The following information is provided,
2399
mainly, as an historical reference.
2400
 
2401
@section Adding a New Host
2402
 
2403
@cindex adding a new host
2404
@cindex host, adding
2405
@value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2406
New host-specific definitions should not be needed.  Older hosts
2407
@value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2408
below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2409
eventually disappear.
2410
 
2411
@table @file
2412
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2413
This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2414
(@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}.  The host
2415
configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2416
 
2417
Host configuration information included a definition of
2418
@code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2419
@code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2420
@code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2421
 
2422
New host only configurations do not need this file.
2423
 
2424
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2425
This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2426
gdb on machine @var{xyz}.  Those definitions and includes are now
2427
handled by Autoconf.
2428
 
2429
New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2430
 
2431
@emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2432
file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2433
@var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}.  That code
2434
also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2435
 
2436
@end table
2437
 
2438
@subheading Generic Host Support Files
2439
 
2440
@cindex generic host support
2441
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2442
various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
2443
defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
2444
the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2445
@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2446
 
2447
Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2448
to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2449
Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2450
into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2451
 
2452
@table @file
2453
@cindex remote debugging support
2454
@cindex serial line support
2455
@item ser-unix.c
2456
This contains serial line support for Unix systems.  This is always
2457
included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2458
variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2459
 
2460
@item ser-go32.c
2461
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2462
using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2463
 
2464
@cindex TCP remote support
2465
@item ser-tcp.c
2466
This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2467
@end table
2468
 
2469
@section Host Conditionals
2470
 
2471
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2472
defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2473
attributes of the host system.  These macros and their meanings (or if
2474
the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2475
they are used is indicated) are:
2476
 
2477
@ftable @code
2478
@item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2479
The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2480
@file{.gdbinit}).
2481
 
2482
@item NO_STD_REGS
2483
This macro is deprecated.
2484
 
2485
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2486
If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2487
of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2488
 
2489
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2490
Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2491
the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2492
 
2493
@item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2494
@cindex DOS text files
2495
Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2496
line terminator.  This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2497
characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2498
which are ``sourced'' by gdb.  It must be possible to open files in binary
2499
mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2500
 
2501
@item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2502
@cindex prompt
2503
The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2504
 
2505
@item DEV_TTY
2506
@cindex terminal device
2507
The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2508
 
2509
@item FOPEN_RB
2510
Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2511
 
2512
@item HAVE_MMAP
2513
@findex mmap
2514
In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2515
tables.  For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2516
 
2517
@item HAVE_TERMIO
2518
Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2519
 
2520
@item INT_MAX
2521
@itemx INT_MIN
2522
@itemx LONG_MAX
2523
@itemx UINT_MAX
2524
@itemx ULONG_MAX
2525
Values for host-side constants.
2526
 
2527
@item ISATTY
2528
Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2529
 
2530
@item LONGEST
2531
This is the longest integer type available on the host.  If not defined,
2532
it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2533
@code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2534
 
2535
@item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2536
@cindex @code{long long} data type
2537
Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}.  This is set
2538
by the @code{configure} script.
2539
 
2540
@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2541
Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2542
the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}.  This is set by the
2543
@code{configure} script.
2544
 
2545
@item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2546
Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}.  This is
2547
set by the @code{configure} script.
2548
 
2549
@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2550
Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2551
numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}.  This is
2552
set by the @code{configure} script.
2553
 
2554
@item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2555
Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2556
float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2557
@code{Lg}.  This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2558
 
2559
@item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2560
Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2561
@code{n} in the file.  This is only used when reading source files.  It
2562
is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2563
 
2564
@item L_SET
2565
This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2566
@code{bfd_seek}).  FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2567
which is the POSIX equivalent.
2568
 
2569
@item NORETURN
2570
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2571
that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2572
indicate that they never return.  The default is already set correctly
2573
if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be defined.
2574
 
2575
@item ATTR_NORETURN
2576
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2577
@code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2578
of functions to indicate that they never return.  The default is already
2579
set correctly if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be
2580
defined.
2581
 
2582
@item SEEK_CUR
2583
@itemx SEEK_SET
2584
Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2585
defined.
2586
 
2587
@item STOP_SIGNAL
2588
This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}.  Defaults to
2589
@code{SIGTSTP}.  (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2590
 
2591
@item USG
2592
Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use.  (FIXME:
2593
This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2594
@file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2595
 
2596
@item lint
2597
Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2598
 
2599
@item volatile
2600
Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2601
@code{/**/}.
2602
@end ftable
2603
 
2604
 
2605
@node Target Architecture Definition
2606
 
2607
@chapter Target Architecture Definition
2608
 
2609
@cindex target architecture definition
2610
@value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2611
machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2612
with them.
2613
 
2614
The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2615
@code{struct gdbarch *}.  The structure, and its methods, are generated
2616
using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2617
 
2618
@menu
2619
* OS ABI Variant Handling::
2620
* Initialize New Architecture::
2621
* Registers and Memory::
2622
* Pointers and Addresses::
2623
* Address Classes::
2624
* Raw and Virtual Registers::
2625
* Register and Memory Data::
2626
* Frame Interpretation::
2627
* Inferior Call Setup::
2628
* Compiler Characteristics::
2629
* Target Conditionals::
2630
* Adding a New Target::
2631
@end menu
2632
 
2633
@node  OS ABI Variant Handling
2634
@section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2635
@cindex OS ABI variants
2636
 
2637
@value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2638
ABIs.  An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2639
variables in the target architecture definition.  There are two major
2640
components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2641
 
2642
A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2643
(the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2644
OS ABI of that file.  Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2645
to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2646
considered to be @dfn{specific}.  A match from a specific sniffer
2647
overrides a match from a generic sniffer.  Multiple sniffers for an
2648
architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2649
different operating systems which use the same basic file format.  The
2650
OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2651
examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2652
sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2653
 
2654
@cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2655
A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2656
selected OS ABI.  There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2657
for each BFD architecture.
2658
 
2659
The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2660
 
2661
@table @code
2662
 
2663
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2664
@item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2665
Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2666
 
2667
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2668
@item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2669
The ABI of the inferior is unknown.  The default @code{gdbarch}
2670
settings for the architecture will be used.
2671
 
2672
@findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2673
@item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2674
UNIX System V Release 4.
2675
 
2676
@findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2677
@item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2678
GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2679
 
2680
@findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2681
@item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2682
Sun Solaris.
2683
 
2684
@findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2685
@item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2686
OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2687
 
2688
@findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2689
@item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2690
GNU using the Linux kernel.
2691
 
2692
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2693
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2694
FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2695
 
2696
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2697
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2698
FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2699
 
2700
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2701
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2702
NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2703
 
2704
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2705
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2706
NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2707
 
2708
@findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2709
@item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2710
OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2711
 
2712
@findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2713
@item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2714
Windows CE.
2715
 
2716
@findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2717
@item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2718
DJGPP.
2719
 
2720
@findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2721
@item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2722
Irix.
2723
 
2724
@findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2725
@item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2726
Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2727
 
2728
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2729
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2730
HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2731
 
2732
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2733
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2734
HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2735
 
2736
@findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2737
@item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2738
QNX Neutrino.
2739
 
2740
@findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2741
@item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2742
Cygwin.
2743
 
2744
@findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2745
@item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2746
AIX.
2747
 
2748
@end table
2749
 
2750
Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2751
 
2752
@deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2753
Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2754
@end deftypefun
2755
 
2756
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2757
Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2758
architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2759
@var{machine} and @var{osabi}.  In most cases, a value of zero for the
2760
machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2761
will suffice.
2762
@end deftypefun
2763
 
2764
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2765
Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2766
BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2767
If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2768
be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2769
any architecture.
2770
@end deftypefun
2771
 
2772
@deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2773
Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2774
The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2775
be determined.
2776
@end deftypefun
2777
 
2778
@deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2779
Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2780
@code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}.  If a handler
2781
corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2782
architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2783
with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2784
@end deftypefun
2785
 
2786
@deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2787
Helper routine for ELF file sniffers.  Examine the file described by
2788
@var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2789
from the note.  This function should be called via
2790
@code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2791
@end deftypefun
2792
 
2793
@node Initialize New Architecture
2794
@section Initializing a New Architecture
2795
 
2796
Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2797
via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant.  The @code{gdbarch} is
2798
registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2799
the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2800
be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup.  The arguments
2801
are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2802
 
2803
The initialization function has this type:
2804
 
2805
@smallexample
2806
static struct gdbarch *
2807
@var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2808
                         struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2809
@end smallexample
2810
 
2811
The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2812
architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2813
have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2814
value.
2815
 
2816
The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2817
is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not.  Then, it should
2818
search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2819
return one if found.  Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2820
create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2821
 
2822
Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2823
architecture.  Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2824
defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2825
However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2826
so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2827
defaults from @var{arches}.
2828
 
2829
@node Registers and Memory
2830
@section Registers and Memory
2831
 
2832
@value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2833
@value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2834
block of memory.  Each register may have a different size.
2835
 
2836
@value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2837
compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2838
that they do match up accurately.  The only way to make this work is
2839
to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2840
and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
2841
 
2842
@value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2843
 
2844
@node Pointers and Addresses
2845
@section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2846
@cindex pointer representation
2847
@cindex address representation
2848
@cindex word-addressed machines
2849
@cindex separate data and code address spaces
2850
@cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2851
@cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2852
@cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2853
@cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2854
@cindex D10V addresses
2855
 
2856
On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2857
indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2858
whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to.  On such
2859
machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2860
However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2861
address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2862
identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2863
 
2864
For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2865
instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2866
actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions.  However, since you can't
2867
jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2868
full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2869
If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2870
then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2871
However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2872
low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2873
zero---byte addresses waste two bits.  So instead of byte addresses,
2874
the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2875
refer to code.  Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2876
code space.
2877
 
2878
However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2879
forms on the D10V.  The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2880
@code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2881
@code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2882
 
2883
(The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2884
affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2885
going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2886
 
2887
To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2888
one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2889
byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2890
of an address of a particular type of data.  In the example above,
2891
@code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2892
@code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2893
@value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2894
and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2895
 
2896
Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2897
processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly.  Thus,
2898
each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2899
distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2900
clean up some architecture-independent code.
2901
 
2902
Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2903
 
2904
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2905
Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2906
@var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2907
appropriate for the current architecture.  This yields an address
2908
@value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc.  Note that
2909
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2910
inferior's.
2911
 
2912
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2913
extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2914
@var{buf} and returns it.  However, if the current architecture is the
2915
D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2916
@var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2917
 
2918
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2919
will signal an internal error.
2920
@end deftypefun
2921
 
2922
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2923
Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2924
pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture.  Note that
2925
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2926
inferior's.
2927
 
2928
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2929
stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2930
appropriate length in @var{buf}.  However, if the current architecture
2931
is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2932
a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2933
 
2934
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2935
will signal an internal error.
2936
@end deftypefun
2937
 
2938
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2939
Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2940
as appropriate for the current architecture.
2941
 
2942
This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2943
For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2944
described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2945
@end deftypefun
2946
 
2947
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2948
Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2949
the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2950
This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2951
above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2952
@end deftypefun
2953
 
2954
Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
2955
relationship between pointers and addresses.  These have default
2956
definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2957
simple unsigned byte addresses.
2958
 
2959
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2960
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2961
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
2962
address the pointer refers to.
2963
 
2964
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2965
C@t{++} reference type.
2966
@end deftypefun
2967
 
2968
@deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2969
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2970
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2971
 
2972
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2973
C@t{++} reference type.
2974
@end deftypefun
2975
 
2976
@node Address Classes
2977
@section Address Classes
2978
@cindex address classes
2979
@cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2980
@cindex DW_AT_address_class
2981
 
2982
Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2983
via the debug information.  For example, some programming environments
2984
define addresses of several different sizes.  If the debug information
2985
distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2986
info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2987
address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2988
following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2989
types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2990
a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2991
 
2992
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
2993
Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
2994
is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
2995
This function is normally called from within a symbol reader.  See
2996
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
2997
@end deftypefun
2998
 
2999
@deftypefun char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3000
Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3001
its name.
3002
@end deftypefun
3003
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{current_gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
3004
Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3005
for that address class qualifier.
3006
@end deftypefun
3007
 
3008
Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3009
the address class functions are defined by default.  Predicate
3010
functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3011
 
3012
Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3013
32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported.  Furthermore,
3014
suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3015
uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3016
of these "short" pointers.  The following functions could be defined
3017
to implement the address class functions:
3018
 
3019
@smallexample
3020
somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3021
                                   int dwarf2_addr_class)
3022
@{
3023
  if (byte_size == 2)
3024
    return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3025
  else
3026
    return 0;
3027
@}
3028
 
3029
static char *
3030
somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3031
@{
3032
  if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3033
    return "short";
3034
  else
3035
    return NULL;
3036
@}
3037
 
3038
int
3039
somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3040
                                           int *type_flags_ptr)
3041
@{
3042
  if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3043
    @{
3044
      *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3045
      return 1;
3046
    @}
3047
  else
3048
    return 0;
3049
@}
3050
@end smallexample
3051
 
3052
The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3053
to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers.  E.g, if
3054
the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
3055
short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
3056
 
3057
@smallexample
3058
(gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3059
type = int * @@short
3060
@end smallexample
3061
 
3062
 
3063
@node Raw and Virtual Registers
3064
@section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
3065
@cindex raw register representation
3066
@cindex virtual register representation
3067
@cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
3068
 
3069
@emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete.  The
3070
functionality described here has largely been replaced by
3071
pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
3072
Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3073
Representations}.  See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3074
Bug Tracking Database} and
3075
@uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3076
up-to-date information.}
3077
 
3078
Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3079
register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3080
In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3081
the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3082
used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3083
 
3084
@emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3085
both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3086
register forms.}
3087
 
3088
For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3089
raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3090
However, they do occasionally differ.  For example:
3091
 
3092
@itemize @bullet
3093
@item
3094
The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type.  However, when
3095
we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3096
floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3097
are unused.  This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3098
allowing more efficient access.  Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3099
type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3100
arrangement is the virtual representation.
3101
 
3102
@item
3103
Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3104
registers, with garbage in their upper bits.  @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3105
bits.  Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3106
raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3107
virtual representation.
3108
@end itemize
3109
 
3110
In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3111
@value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3112
can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience.  @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3113
@code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3114
@value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3115
 
3116
Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3117
conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3118
 
3119
@deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3120
Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3121
and virtual formats.
3122
 
3123
You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3124
unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3125
@end deftypefn
3126
 
3127
@deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3128
The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value.  This is the number
3129
of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3130
remote protocol packet.
3131
@end deftypefn
3132
 
3133
@deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3134
The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3135
This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3136
register's value.
3137
@end deftypefn
3138
 
3139
@deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3140
This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3141
@var{reg}.  Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3142
register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3143
always uses the virtual form.
3144
@end deftypefn
3145
 
3146
@deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3147
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3148
should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}.  The buffer
3149
at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3150
convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3151
 
3152
Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3153
@code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3154
arguments in different orders.
3155
 
3156
You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3157
for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3158
value.
3159
@end deftypefn
3160
 
3161
@deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3162
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3163
should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}.  The buffer
3164
at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3165
convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3166
 
3167
Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3168
their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3169
@end deftypefn
3170
 
3171
 
3172
@node Register and Memory Data
3173
@section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3174
@cindex register representation
3175
@cindex memory representation
3176
@cindex representations, register and memory
3177
@cindex register data formats, converting
3178
@cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3179
 
3180
@emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3181
significant change.  Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3182
section are likely to be subject to further revision.  See
3183
@uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3184
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3185
further information.  cagney/2002-05-06.}
3186
 
3187
Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3188
form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3189
For example:
3190
 
3191
@itemize @bullet
3192
 
3193
@item
3194
The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3195
floating-point registers.
3196
 
3197
@item
3198
The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers.  The
3199
@code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3200
when stored in a register.
3201
 
3202
@end itemize
3203
 
3204
In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3205
the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3206
the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3207
Interface.
3208
 
3209
For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3210
representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3211
However, they do occasionally differ.  Your architecture may define the
3212
following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3213
representations of a data type:
3214
 
3215
@deftypefun int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3216
Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3217
register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3218
when stored in memory.
3219
 
3220
When non-zero, the macros @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3221
@code{value_to_register} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3222
 
3223
This function should return zero for the register's native type, when
3224
no conversion is necessary.
3225
@end deftypefun
3226
 
3227
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3228
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3229
@var{type}.  The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3230
format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3231
 
3232
Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3233
take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3234
 
3235
You should only use @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} with registers for which
3236
the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3237
@end deftypefun
3238
 
3239
@deftypefun void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3240
Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3241
raw format.
3242
 
3243
Note that @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and @code{gdbarch_value_to_register}
3244
take their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3245
 
3246
You should only use @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} with registers for which
3247
the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a non-zero value.
3248
@end deftypefun
3249
 
3250
@deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3251
See @file{mips-tdep.c}.  It does not do what you want.
3252
@end deftypefn
3253
 
3254
@node Frame Interpretation
3255
@section Frame Interpretation
3256
 
3257
@node Inferior Call Setup
3258
@section Inferior Call Setup
3259
 
3260
@node Compiler Characteristics
3261
@section Compiler Characteristics
3262
 
3263
@node Target Conditionals
3264
@section Target Conditionals
3265
 
3266
This section describes the macros and functions that you can use to define the
3267
target machine.
3268
 
3269
@table @code
3270
 
3271
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3272
@findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
3273
If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3274
really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
3275
@var{addr}.  This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
3276
in all contexts.
3277
 
3278
For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3279
2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3280
instruction.  Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3281
boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3282
address of the instruction.  @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
3283
example look like that:
3284
@smallexample
3285
arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
3286
@{
3287
  return (addr &= ~0x3);
3288
@}
3289
@end smallexample
3290
 
3291
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3292
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
3293
If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3294
referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3295
and return 1.  If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3296
return 0.
3297
 
3298
The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3299
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3300
possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3301
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3302
 
3303
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3304
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
3305
Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
3306
has been defined.
3307
 
3308
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3309
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
3310
Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3311
the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3312
used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class.  The value
3313
returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3314
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3315
values or'd together.
3316
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3317
 
3318
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
3319
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
3320
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
3321
been defined.
3322
 
3323
@item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
3324
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
3325
Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3326
flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3327
 
3328
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
3329
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
3330
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
3331
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3332
 
3333
@item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3334
@findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
3335
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3336
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3337
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3338
C@t{++} reference type.
3339
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3340
 
3341
@item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
3342
@findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
3343
Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3344
parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3345
original type, rather than the promoted type.
3346
 
3347
@item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
3348
@findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
3349
This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
3350
the endianness of the target byte order.  A value of 1 means that the bits
3351
are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3352
 
3353
@item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
3354
@findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
3355
Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
3356
bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
3357
little-endian.
3358
 
3359
@item BREAKPOINT
3360
@findex BREAKPOINT
3361
This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3362
memory where a breakpoint is set.  Although it's common to use a trap
3363
instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3364
pattern could be an invalid instruction.  The breakpoint must be no
3365
longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3366
 
3367
@code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3368
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3369
 
3370
@item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3371
@itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3372
@findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3373
@findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3374
Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3375
 
3376
@code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3377
favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
3378
 
3379
@item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3380
@findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
3381
@anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
3382
contents and size of a breakpoint instruction.  It returns a pointer to
3383
a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3384
length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3385
counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3386
breakpoint should be inserted.
3387
 
3388
Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3389
not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3390
instruction.  The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3391
instruction of the architecture.
3392
 
3393
Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3394
 
3395
@item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3396
@itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
3397
@findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
3398
@findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
3399
Insert or remove memory based breakpoints.  Reasonable defaults
3400
(@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3401
@code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3402
provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
3403
architectures.  Architectures which may want to set
3404
@code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3405
conventional manner.
3406
 
3407
It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3408
custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3409
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
3410
reason.
3411
 
3412
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
3413
@findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
3414
@cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3415
Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3416
address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3417
breakpoint placement.  This method is not needed by most targets.
3418
 
3419
The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3420
The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3421
instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3422
instruction or instruction bundle.  When the processor executes
3423
one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3424
in parallel.
3425
 
3426
In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3427
from distinct source statements into the same bundle.  The line number
3428
information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3429
refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle.  So,
3430
if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3431
statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3432
instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3433
(Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3434
in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3435
at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3436
 
3437
The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
3438
breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3439
the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3440
 
3441
Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3442
expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3443
is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3444
 
3445
@item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
3446
@findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
3447
See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3448
 
3449
This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
3450
(@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
3451
 
3452
@item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
3453
@findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
3454
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3455
from an inferior process.  This is only relevant if
3456
@code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3457
 
3458
@item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
3459
@findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
3460
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3461
written to the target.  This is often the case for program counters,
3462
status words, and other special registers.  This function returns 0 as
3463
default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3464
 
3465
@item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
3466
@findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
3467
Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
3468
@var{type} in a non-standard form.
3469
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3470
 
3471
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
3472
@findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
3473
This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3474
program encounters a breakpoint.  This is often the number of bytes in
3475
@code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always.  For most targets this value will be 0.
3476
 
3477
@item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3478
@findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3479
If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3480
library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3481
 
3482
@item void gdbarch_print_float_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3483
@findex gdbarch_print_float_info
3484
If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3485
the processor's floating point unit.
3486
 
3487
@item void gdbarch_print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3488
@findex gdbarch_print_registers_info
3489
If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3490
specified @var{frame}.  If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3491
either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3492
registers (@var{all} is zero).
3493
 
3494
The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3495
zero omits floating-point registers.
3496
 
3497
@item int gdbarch_print_vector_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{file}, @var{frame}, @var{args})
3498
@findex gdbarch_print_vector_info
3499
If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3500
to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3501
 
3502
By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3503
registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3504
 
3505
@item int gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf_regnr})
3506
@findex gdbarch_dwarf_reg_to_regnum
3507
Convert DWARF register number @var{dwarf_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
3508
not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3509
 
3510
@item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
3511
@findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
3512
Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
3513
If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3514
 
3515
@item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
3516
@findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
3517
Convert ECOFF register number  @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
3518
not defined, no conversion will be performed.
3519
 
3520
@item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3521
@findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3522
If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3523
macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3524
 
3525
This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3526
is not defined.
3527
 
3528
@item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3529
@findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3530
Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3531
represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3532
Otherwise return 0.
3533
 
3534
@item CORE_ADDR frame_align (@var{gdbarch}, @var{address})
3535
@anchor{frame_align}
3536
@findex frame_align
3537
Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3538
requirements for the start of a new stack frame.  A stack frame's
3539
alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3540
stack alignment requirements.
3541
 
3542
This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3543
the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3544
value are correctly aligned.
3545
 
3546
This function always adjusts the address in the direction of stack
3547
growth.
3548
 
3549
By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3550
 
3551
@item int gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size (@var{gdbarch})
3552
@findex gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size
3553
The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3554
@sc{abi}.  A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3555
allocating extra stack space).
3556
 
3557
When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3558
modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3559
@var{gdbarch_frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3560
stack.
3561
 
3562
By default, zero bytes are allocated.  The value must be aligned
3563
(@pxref{frame_align}).
3564
 
3565
The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3566
@emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3567
@cindex red zone
3568
 
3569
@item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3570
@findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3571
Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3572
 
3573
@item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3574
@findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3575
Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3576
outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise.  Most normal
3577
situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3578
chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3579
startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3580
@code{_start}.
3581
 
3582
@item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3583
@findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3584
See @file{frame.h}.  Determines the address of all registers in the
3585
current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}.  Space for
3586
@code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3587
@code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3588
@code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3589
 
3590
@code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3591
 
3592
@item int gdbarch_frame_num_args (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
3593
@findex gdbarch_frame_num_args
3594
For the frame described by @var{frame} return the number of arguments that
3595
are being passed.  If the number of arguments is not known, return
3596
@code{-1}.
3597
 
3598
@item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3599
@findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3600
@anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3601
saved there.  This is the return address.
3602
 
3603
This method is deprecated. @xref{gdbarch_unwind_pc}.
3604
 
3605
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_pc (@var{next_frame})
3606
@findex gdbarch_unwind_pc
3607
@anchor{gdbarch_unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in
3608
@var{next_frame}'s caller, at which execution will resume after
3609
@var{next_frame} returns.  This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3610
 
3611
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3612
is typically no more than:
3613
 
3614
@smallexample
3615
ULONGEST pc;
3616
pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_PC_REGNUM);
3617
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
3618
@end smallexample
3619
 
3620
@noindent
3621
@xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3622
 
3623
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_unwind_sp (@var{gdbarch}, @var{next_frame})
3624
@findex gdbarch_unwind_sp
3625
@anchor{gdbarch_unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address.  This is
3626
commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3627
 
3628
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3629
is typically no more than:
3630
 
3631
@smallexample
3632
ULONGEST sp;
3633
sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, S390_SP_REGNUM);
3634
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
3635
@end smallexample
3636
 
3637
@noindent
3638
@xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3639
 
3640
@item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3641
@findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3642
For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3643
function end symbol is 0.  For such targets, you must define
3644
@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3645
function's epilogue.
3646
 
3647
@item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3648
@findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3649
An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3650
used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3651
function's first genuine instruction.
3652
 
3653
This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3654
the address of its first instruction.  However, on the VAX, for
3655
example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3656
indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function.  The
3657
VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3658
appropriate registers automatically.  Thus, since the offset from the
3659
function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3660
@code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3661
 
3662
@item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3663
@itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3664
@findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3665
@findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3666
If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3667
look for to detect that GCC compiled the file.  The default symbols
3668
are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3669
respectively.  (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3670
 
3671
@item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3672
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
3673
For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter.  On the
3674
DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3675
the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3676
 
3677
This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3678
assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint.  It takes a
3679
@code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3680
pointer.  It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3681
 
3682
@item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3683
@findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3684
Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system.  This
3685
conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3686
feature-specific macros.  It was introduced in a haste and we are
3687
repenting at leisure.
3688
 
3689
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3690
An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3691
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3692
 
3693
@item int gdbarch_inner_than (@var{gdbarch}, @var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3694
@findex gdbarch_inner_than
3695
Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3696
stack top) stack address @var{rhs}.  Let the function return
3697
@w{@code{lhs < rhs}} if the target's stack grows downward in memory, or
3698
@w{@code{lhs > rsh}} if the stack grows upward.
3699
 
3700
@item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
3701
@findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3702
Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
3703
The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3704
the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3705
final `return from function call' instruction.
3706
 
3707
@item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
3708
@findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
3709
Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3710
trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3711
 
3712
@item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3713
@findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3714
Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3715
dynamic linker.
3716
 
3717
@item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3718
@findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3719
Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3720
should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3721
function.  A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3722
to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3723
stepping will suffice.
3724
 
3725
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3726
@findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
3727
@cindex converting integers to addresses
3728
Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3729
conversions specially.  Converts that value to an address according to
3730
the current architectures conventions.
3731
 
3732
@emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3733
their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3734
@code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3735
computed by the target program.  Any deviation from this rule can cause
3736
major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully.  In
3737
other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3738
conversions in clever and useful ways.  It has, however, been pointed
3739
out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3740
to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3741
disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}.  Adding an architecture
3742
method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
3743
@value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3744
 
3745
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3746
Addresses}.
3747
 
3748
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
3749
@findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
3750
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3751
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
3752
address the pointer refers to.
3753
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3754
 
3755
@item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
3756
@findex gdbarch_register_to_value
3757
Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3758
@var{type}.
3759
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3760
 
3761
@item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3762
@findex register_reggroup_p
3763
@cindex register groups
3764
Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3765
group @var{reggroup}.
3766
 
3767
By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3768
 
3769
@table @code
3770
@item float_reggroup
3771
Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3772
@item vector_reggroup
3773
Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3774
@item general_reggroup
3775
Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3776
floating-point.  @samp{float_reggroup}.
3777
@item save_reggroup
3778
@itemx restore_reggroup
3779
@itemx all_reggroup
3780
Any register with a valid name.
3781
@end table
3782
 
3783
@item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3784
@findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3785
Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3786
register's virtual type.
3787
Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3788
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3789
 
3790
@item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3791
@findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3792
Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3793
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3794
 
3795
@item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3796
@findex register_type
3797
If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}.  This function
3798
supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}.  @xref{Target Architecture
3799
Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3800
 
3801
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3802
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3803
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3804
form.
3805
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3806
 
3807
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3808
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3809
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3810
form.
3811
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3812
 
3813
@item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3814
@findex regset_from_core_section
3815
Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3816
@var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3817
 
3818
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3819
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3820
Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3821
mechanism.  The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3822
 
3823
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3824
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3825
A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3826
@var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3827
the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3828
for examples.
3829
 
3830
@item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
3831
@findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
3832
Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3833
debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3834
them.  So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3835
address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3836
linking faster.
3837
 
3838
Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
3839
argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
3840
are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
3841
debugging information.  @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
3842
addresses of compilation units in the text segment.  @code{N_FUN} stabs
3843
mark the starts and ends of functions.
3844
 
3845
In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
3846
 
3847
@itemize @bullet
3848
@item
3849
@code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero.  Instead of using those
3850
addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
3851
taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
3852
minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table).  In other words, the stab
3853
has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
3854
that carries the address.
3855
 
3856
@item
3857
@code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too.  You just look at the
3858
@code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
3859
guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
3860
@end itemize
3861
 
3862
@item int gdbarch_pc_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3863
@findex gdbarch_pc_regnum
3864
If the program counter is kept in a register, then let this function return
3865
the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3866
 
3867
This should only need to be defined if @code{gdbarch_read_pc} and
3868
@code{gdbarch_write_pc} are not defined.
3869
 
3870
@item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3871
@findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
3872
@anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
3873
nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
3874
instead of value.
3875
 
3876
@item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3877
@findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3878
A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3879
 
3880
@item gdbarch_ps_regnum (@var{gdbarch}
3881
@findex gdbarch_ps_regnum
3882
If defined, this function returns the number of the processor status
3883
register.
3884
(This definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3885
 
3886
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3887
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
3888
@findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3889
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3890
the inferior function onto the stack.  In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
3891
code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
3892
the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3893
 
3894
@var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3895
function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3896
 
3897
Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3898
 
3899
This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3900
 
3901
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
3902
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
3903
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3904
instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3905
called function should return.
3906
 
3907
Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3908
should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3909
the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3910
 
3911
By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3912
(@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3913
reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3914
 
3915
This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}} and
3916
@code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3917
 
3918
@item const char *gdbarch_register_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnr})
3919
@findex gdbarch_register_name
3920
Return the name of register @var{regnr} as a string.  May return @code{NULL}
3921
to indicate that @var{regnr} is not a valid register.
3922
 
3923
@item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3924
@findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3925
@anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3926
notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3927
passed to the inferior code.  This is the value of the @code{SP}
3928
after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3929
allocated on the stack.  @xref{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id}.
3930
 
3931
@item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
3932
@findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
3933
Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
3934
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
3935
 
3936
@item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3937
@findex gdbarch_return_value
3938
@anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3939
type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3940
would use.
3941
 
3942
@value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3943
@code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3944
in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3945
value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3946
passed in as the function's first parameter.
3947
 
3948
If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
3949
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
3950
@var{regcache}.
3951
 
3952
If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
3953
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
3954
@var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
3955
just returned function).
3956
 
3957
@emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
3958
store methods.  By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
3959
the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place.  If
3960
@value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
3961
instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
3962
return-value extract and store.}
3963
 
3964
@emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
3965
parameter, and such a parameter should not be added.  If an architecture
3966
that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
3967
then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
3968
@var{function} should be pursued.}
3969
 
3970
@emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
3971
to the inner most frame.  While replacing @var{regcache} with a
3972
@code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
3973
limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
3974
 
3975
@item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
3976
@findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
3977
Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint.  @value{GDBN} normally
3978
steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
3979
re-inserting the breakpoint.  However, permanent breakpoints are
3980
hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
3981
doesn't work.  Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
3982
processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
3983
This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
3984
of a branch or jump.
3985
 
3986
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_prologue (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ip})
3987
@findex gdbarch_skip_prologue
3988
A function that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
3989
function entry prologue found at @var{ip}.
3990
 
3991
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
3992
@findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
3993
If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
3994
the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
3995
that is at the start of the real function.
3996
 
3997
@item int gdbarch_sp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
3998
@findex gdbarch_sp_regnum
3999
If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then use this function to return
4000
the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
4001
there is no such register.
4002
 
4003
@item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4004
@findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4005
Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4006
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4007
 
4008
@item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4009
@findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4010
The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable.  (Never defined in
4011
current sources.)
4012
 
4013
@item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4014
@findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4015
Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4016
 
4017
@item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4018
@findex gdbarch_char_signed
4019
Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4020
it should be unsigned.
4021
 
4022
The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4023
equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4024
character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4025
Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4026
on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4027
 
4028
@item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4029
@findex gdbarch_double_bit
4030
Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4031
 
4032
@item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4033
@findex gdbarch_float_bit
4034
Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4035
 
4036
@item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4037
@findex gdbarch_int_bit
4038
Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4039
 
4040
@item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4041
@findex gdbarch_long_bit
4042
Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4043
 
4044
@item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4045
@findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4046
Number of bits in a long double float;
4047
defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4048
 
4049
@item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4050
@findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4051
Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4052
@w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4053
 
4054
@item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4055
@findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4056
Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4057
@w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4058
 
4059
@item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4060
@findex gdbarch_short_bit
4061
Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4062
 
4063
@item  CORE_ADDR gdbarch_read_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4064
@findex gdbarch_read_pc
4065
@itemx gdbarch_write_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache}, @var{val})
4066
@findex gdbarch_write_pc
4067
@anchor{gdbarch_write_pc}
4068
@itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4069
@findex TARGET_READ_SP
4070
@itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4071
@findex TARGET_READ_FP
4072
@findex gdbarch_read_pc
4073
@findex gdbarch_write_pc
4074
@findex read_sp
4075
@findex read_fp
4076
@anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{gdbarch_read_pc},
4077
@code{gdbarch_write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}.  For most targets, these may be
4078
left undefined.  @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4079
functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4080
 
4081
These macros and functions are useful when a target keeps one of these
4082
registers in a hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register
4083
and part in an ordinary register.
4084
 
4085
@xref{gdbarch_unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4086
 
4087
@item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4088
@findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4089
Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4090
pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}.  If virtual frame pointers
4091
are not used, a default definition simply returns
4092
@code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4093
 
4094
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4095
If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4096
watchpoints.  @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4097
other related macros.
4098
 
4099
@item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4100
@findex gdbarch_print_insn
4101
This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4102
instruction.  It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4103
debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.  If
4104
a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4105
accessor function for the global pointer
4106
@code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}.  This usually points to a function in
4107
the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4108
@var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4109
@file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4110
decoding routine.
4111
 
4112
@item frame_id gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
4113
@findex gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id
4114
@anchor{gdbarch_unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
4115
frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4116
frame.  The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4117
previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4118
@xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4119
 
4120
@item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4121
@findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4122
If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4123
given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4124
allocated for it on the stack.  @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4125
being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4126
for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4127
other compilers.
4128
 
4129
This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4130
(@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4131
 
4132
@item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4133
@findex gdbarch_value_to_register
4134
Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
4135
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4136
 
4137
@end table
4138
 
4139
Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4140
 
4141
@ftable @code
4142
@item BPT_VECTOR
4143
Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector.  If
4144
not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4145
 
4146
@item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4147
Defaults to @code{1}.
4148
 
4149
@item const char *gdbarch_name_of_malloc (@var{gdbarch})
4150
@findex gdbarch_name_of_malloc
4151
A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4152
allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4153
 
4154
@end ftable
4155
 
4156
@node Adding a New Target
4157
@section Adding a New Target
4158
 
4159
@cindex adding a target
4160
The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4161
 
4162
@table @file
4163
@vindex TDEPFILES
4164
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4165
Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target.  Specifies what
4166
object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4167
@samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}.  Also specifies
4168
the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4169
tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4170
 
4171
You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4172
but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4173
future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4174
 
4175
@item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4176
Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine.  On
4177
some machines it doesn't exist at all.  Sometimes the macros in
4178
@file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4179
as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4180
function.  This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4181
and debug.
4182
 
4183
@item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4184
@itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4185
This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4186
processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  If used, it is included by
4187
@file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}.  It can be shared among many targets that use
4188
the same processor.
4189
 
4190
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4191
(@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains
4192
macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4193
format and instructions.
4194
 
4195
New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4196
 
4197
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4198
This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4199
processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  If used, it is included by
4200
@file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}.  It can be shared among many targets that use the
4201
same processor.
4202
 
4203
New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4204
 
4205
@end table
4206
 
4207
If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4208
@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4209
facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4210
instruction needed; etc.).  Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4211
that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4212
@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4213
 
4214
@node Target Descriptions
4215
@chapter Target Descriptions
4216
@cindex target descriptions
4217
 
4218
The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
4219
contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture.  For
4220
some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
4221
instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
4222
@dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
4223
more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
4224
directly.
4225
 
4226
For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
4227
target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
4228
Debugging with @value{GDBN}}.  This section will cover some related
4229
topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
4230
 
4231
@menu
4232
* Target Descriptions Implementation::
4233
* Adding Target Described Register Support::
4234
@end menu
4235
 
4236
@node Target Descriptions Implementation
4237
@section Target Descriptions Implementation
4238
@cindex target descriptions, implementation
4239
 
4240
Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
4241
an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
4242
reverts to a default gdbarch.  Then, after connecting, it looks for a
4243
new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
4244
 
4245
A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
4246
@samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
4247
@code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector.  For instance,
4248
the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
4249
64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
4250
 
4251
If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
4252
incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}.  Any
4253
@samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
4254
architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
4255
new architecture.  Then the initialization routine is called, and has
4256
a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
4257
of the target description.  For instance, it can recognize any
4258
properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine.  Also
4259
see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
4260
 
4261
@node Adding Target Described Register Support
4262
@section Adding Target Described Register Support
4263
@cindex target descriptions, adding register support
4264
 
4265
Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
4266
instance of the target.  But it takes a little work in the architecture
4267
specific routines to support this.
4268
 
4269
A target description must either have no registers or a complete
4270
set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
4271
with the target defined registers.  It is the architecture's
4272
responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
4273
everything it needs.  To keep architecture code simple, the same
4274
mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
4275
standard registers.
4276
 
4277
If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
4278
registers.  The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
4279
 
4280
@itemize @bullet
4281
 
4282
@item
4283
Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
4284
searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
4285
 
4286
@item
4287
Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
4288
 
4289
@item
4290
Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
4291
to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
4292
 
4293
@item
4294
Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
4295
feature is missing expected registers.  This will produce a warning that
4296
the description was incomplete.
4297
 
4298
@item
4299
Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
4300
is called.
4301
 
4302
@item
4303
Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
4304
fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
4305
 
4306
@item
4307
Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
4308
returning it.
4309
 
4310
@end itemize
4311
 
4312
After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
4313
@code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
4314
routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
4315
the target description.  @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
4316
for any additional registers in the description.
4317
 
4318
Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
4319
 
4320
@itemize @bullet
4321
 
4322
@item
4323
Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
4324
constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
4325
as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}.  But because
4326
pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
4327
which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
4328
can not be used for pseudos.  They must be numbered relative to
4329
@code{num_regs} instead.
4330
 
4331
@item
4332
The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
4333
architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
4334
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
4335
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
4336
describing pseudo registers.  These routines will be passed
4337
internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
4338
gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
4339
 
4340
@end itemize
4341
 
4342
 
4343
@node Target Vector Definition
4344
 
4345
@chapter Target Vector Definition
4346
@cindex target vector
4347
 
4348
The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4349
abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4350
actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4351
@value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4352
each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4353
 
4354
@menu
4355
* Managing Execution State::
4356
* Existing Targets::
4357
@end menu
4358
 
4359
@node Managing Execution State
4360
@section Managing Execution State
4361
@cindex execution state
4362
 
4363
A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4364
stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4365
manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4366
inferior).  Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4367
active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4368
when the target has exited or not yet started.
4369
 
4370
For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4371
not create a running program.  Neither registers nor memory are
4372
accessible until @code{run}.  Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4373
program can not continue executing.  But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4374
remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4375
are directed to the simulator.
4376
 
4377
A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4378
onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4379
@code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4380
@code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4381
 
4382
A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4383
still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4384
@code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}.  Instead, it should
4385
call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4386
in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4387
after connection.  It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4388
time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4389
@code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4390
@code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4391
@code{to_mourn_inferior}).  The target should also make sure to call
4392
@code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4393
target to inactive state.
4394
 
4395
@node Existing Targets
4396
@section Existing Targets
4397
@cindex targets
4398
 
4399
@subsection File Targets
4400
 
4401
Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4402
 
4403
@subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4404
 
4405
@value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4406
that runs in the target system.  @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4407
@dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4408
systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4409
 
4410
The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4411
your target code.  What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4412
SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4413
program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4414
 
4415
The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4416
@code{trap_low}:
4417
 
4418
@enumerate
4419
@item
4420
%l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4421
 
4422
@item
4423
traps are disabled;
4424
 
4425
@item
4426
you are in the correct trap window.
4427
@end enumerate
4428
 
4429
As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4430
is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4431
The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4432
hardware trap vector.  That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4433
which is provided by the external environment.  For instance, this could
4434
set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4435
first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4436
 
4437
For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4438
``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4439
and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions.  Anyway, this is all
4440
controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify.  The most important
4441
trap for us is for @code{ta 1}.  Without that, we can't single step or
4442
do breakpoints.  Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4443
of the debugger/stub.
4444
 
4445
From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4446
They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4447
 
4448
@subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4449
 
4450
@subsection Custom Protocols
4451
 
4452
@subsection Transport Layer
4453
 
4454
@subsection Builtin Simulator
4455
 
4456
 
4457
@node Native Debugging
4458
 
4459
@chapter Native Debugging
4460
@cindex native debugging
4461
 
4462
Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4463
 
4464
@table @file
4465
@vindex NATDEPFILES
4466
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4467
Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4468
machine @var{xyz}.  In particular, this lists the required
4469
native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4470
Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4471
@var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}.  You can also
4472
define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4473
@samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4474
 
4475
@emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4476
originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4477
on machine @var{xyz}.  While the file is no longer used for this
4478
purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains.  Perhaps someone will
4479
eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4480
suffix.}
4481
 
4482
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4483
(@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains C
4484
macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4485
child process control and core file support.
4486
 
4487
@item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4488
Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4489
this machine.  On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4490
@end table
4491
 
4492
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4493
various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
4494
defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
4495
the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4496
@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4497
 
4498
Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4499
to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4500
Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4501
into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4502
 
4503
@table @file
4504
@item inftarg.c
4505
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4506
processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4507
 
4508
@item procfs.c
4509
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4510
processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4511
 
4512
@item fork-child.c
4513
This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4514
and exec'' to start up a child process.
4515
 
4516
@item infptrace.c
4517
This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4518
the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4519
@end table
4520
 
4521
@section Native core file Support
4522
@cindex native core files
4523
 
4524
@table @file
4525
@findex fetch_core_registers
4526
@item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4527
Support for reading registers out of a core file.  This routine calls
4528
@code{register_addr()}, see below.  Now that BFD is used to read core
4529
files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4530
just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4531
@code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4532
 
4533
@item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4534
If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4535
@code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4536
set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4537
register number @code{regno}.  @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4538
``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}.  If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4539
@file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4540
use the macro in it.  If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4541
you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4542
to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4543
@code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4544
the @code{NATDEPFILES} list.  If you have your own
4545
@code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4546
@code{register_addr()}.  Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4547
implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4548
@end table
4549
 
4550
When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4551
possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4552
code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4553
@file{bfd/trad-core.c}.  First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4554
machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4555
(possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4556
@file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4557
exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}).  Then
4558
modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4559
section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4560
segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4561
information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4562
sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment.  This
4563
section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4564
standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4565
around in.
4566
 
4567
Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4568
@code{fetch_core_registers}.  If you can use the generic one, it's in
4569
@file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4570
It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4571
its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4572
segment, its length, and a 2.  The routine should suck out the supplied
4573
register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4574
 
4575
If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4576
format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4577
reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4578
 
4579
@section ptrace
4580
 
4581
@section /proc
4582
 
4583
@section win32
4584
 
4585
@section shared libraries
4586
 
4587
@section Native Conditionals
4588
@cindex native conditionals
4589
 
4590
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4591
defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4592
target systems are the same.  These macros should be defined (or left
4593
undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4594
 
4595
@table @code
4596
 
4597
@item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4598
@findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4599
If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4600
define this to ensure that all values are correct.  This usually entails
4601
a read from the child.
4602
 
4603
[Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4604
currently.]
4605
 
4606
@item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4607
@findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4608
Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4609
@code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4610
@file{@var{host}-nat.c}.  If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4611
@file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4612
routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4613
 
4614
@item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4615
@findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4616
This functions normally returns the number of the first floating
4617
point register, if the machine has such registers.  As such, it would
4618
appear only in target-specific code.  However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4619
to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4620
 
4621
@item int gdbarch_get_longjmp_target (@var{gdbarch})
4622
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4623
For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter.  On the
4624
DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4625
@file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4626
 
4627
This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4628
assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint.  It takes a
4629
@code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4630
pointer.  It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4631
 
4632
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4633
An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4634
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4635
 
4636
@item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4637
@findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4638
Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4639
user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4640
 
4641
@item PROC_NAME_FMT
4642
@findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4643
Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device.  Should be
4644
defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4645
definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4646
 
4647
@item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4648
@findex SOLIB_ADD
4649
Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4650
@var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4651
@var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4652
processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4653
 
4654
@item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4655
@findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4656
Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4657
want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4658
 
4659
@item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4660
@findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4661
When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4662
twice; once when
4663
the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs.  If the actual
4664
number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4665
expand into the number expected.
4666
 
4667
@end table
4668
 
4669
@node Support Libraries
4670
 
4671
@chapter Support Libraries
4672
 
4673
@section BFD
4674
@cindex BFD library
4675
 
4676
BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4677
 
4678
@table @emph
4679
@item identifying executable and core files
4680
BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4681
several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4682
 
4683
@item access to sections of files
4684
BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4685
sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4686
(such as the text section or the data section).  @value{GDBN} simply
4687
calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4688
length @var{z}.
4689
 
4690
@item specialized core file support
4691
BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
4692
core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
4693
file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
4694
file.
4695
 
4696
@item locating the symbol information
4697
@value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
4698
symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file.  @value{GDBN} itself
4699
handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
4700
symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
4701
string table, etc.
4702
@end table
4703
 
4704
@section opcodes
4705
@cindex opcodes library
4706
 
4707
The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler.  (It's a separate
4708
library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
4709
 
4710
@section readline
4711
@cindex readline library
4712
The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
4713
that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
4714
 
4715
@section libiberty
4716
@cindex @code{libiberty} library
4717
 
4718
The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
4719
that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
4720
systems.  Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
4721
groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
4722
environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
4723
a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
4724
functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
4725
beyond standard functions).
4726
 
4727
@value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
4728
library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
4729
floating format support functions, the input options parser
4730
@samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
4731
 
4732
@subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
4733
@cindex @code{obstacks}
4734
 
4735
The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
4736
chunks of memory.  Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
4737
like a stack.  Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
4738
allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
4739
@code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
4740
@code{obstacks}).
4741
 
4742
The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
4743
object files.  There is an obstack associated with each internal
4744
representation of an object file.  Lots of things get allocated on
4745
these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
4746
symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
4747
fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
4748
offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
4749
string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
4750
information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
4751
unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data.  Plus
4752
various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
4753
names of types.
4754
 
4755
An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
4756
that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
4757
various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
4758
once using the @code{obstack_free} function.  The @code{obstack_free}
4759
function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
4760
deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
4761
start the cleanups).  Because of the stack like structure of the
4762
@code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
4763
obstack.  There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
4764
happens.  Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
4765
is allocated to the obstack.  Only the local data is deleted from the
4766
obstack.  Of course this assumes that nothing between the
4767
@code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
4768
else on the same obstack.  For this reason it is best and safest to
4769
use temporary @code{obstacks}.
4770
 
4771
Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se.  It is safe only
4772
under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
4773
longer needed.  In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
4774
when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
4775
new symbol file.
4776
 
4777
@section gnu-regex
4778
@cindex regular expressions library
4779
 
4780
Regex conditionals.
4781
 
4782
@table @code
4783
@item C_ALLOCA
4784
 
4785
@item NFAILURES
4786
 
4787
@item RE_NREGS
4788
 
4789
@item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
4790
 
4791
@item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
4792
 
4793
@item SYNTAX_TABLE
4794
 
4795
@item Sword
4796
 
4797
@item sparc
4798
@end table
4799
 
4800
@section Array Containers
4801
@cindex Array Containers
4802
@cindex VEC
4803
 
4804
Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
4805
objects.  C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
4806
and repetitive.  The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
4807
and using a typesafe vector type.  The functions defined will be
4808
inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
4809
Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
4810
 
4811
An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
4812
The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
4813
the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
4814
bookkeeping.  Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
4815
accidentally mixing up the contents.  Think of these as C++ templates,
4816
but implemented in C.
4817
 
4818
Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
4819
and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
4820
these variants.  Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
4821
pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
4822
stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
4823
dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector.  The scalar
4824
object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
4825
elements are returned by value.
4826
 
4827
There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors.  The iterator
4828
returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
4829
variable passed by reference.  Because the iterator will be inlined,
4830
the address-of can be optimized away.
4831
 
4832
The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
4833
are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
4834
itself.  This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
4835
--- always use a pointer to a vector.  The one exception is the final
4836
field of a structure, which could be a vector type.  You will have to
4837
use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
4838
such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
4839
the @dfn{safe} allocation variants).  The trailing array idiom is used
4840
(rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
4841
@code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
4842
minimal space in the structure containing them.
4843
 
4844
Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
4845
available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants.  The former presumes
4846
that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
4847
(it dies if there is not).  The latter will reallocate the vector, if
4848
needed.  Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
4849
If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
4850
to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
4851
@dfn{quick} operation.  This will ensure there are at least as many
4852
elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
4853
too few spare slots.  If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
4854
but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
4855
is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation.  You
4856
can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
4857
 
4858
You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
4859
remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
4860
in one go, use the truncate operation.  The insert and remove
4861
operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
4862
There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
4863
ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
4864
@code{unordered_remove}.  The latter function copies the end element
4865
into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation.  The
4866
@code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
4867
the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
4868
 
4869
If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
4870
accessor will return the address of the start of the vector.  Also the
4871
@code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
4872
vector.  You will not normally need to use these two functions.
4873
 
4874
Vector types are defined using a
4875
@code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro.  Variables of vector
4876
type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro.  The
4877
characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
4878
@var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
4879
(@code{I}) type.  Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
4880
awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one.  There is a
4881
check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
4882
@code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
4883
that is not possible in plain C.
4884
 
4885
An example of their use would be,
4886
 
4887
@smallexample
4888
DEF_VEC_P(tree);   // non-managed tree vector.
4889
 
4890
struct my_struct @{
4891
  VEC(tree) *v;      // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
4892
@};
4893
 
4894
struct my_struct *s;
4895
 
4896
if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
4897
VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
4898
for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
4899
  @{ do something with elt @}
4900
 
4901
@end smallexample
4902
 
4903
The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
4904
accessors provided.  They are enumerated here:
4905
 
4906
@table @code
4907
@item VEC_length
4908
Return the number of items in the array,
4909
 
4910
@item VEC_empty
4911
Return true if the array has no elements.
4912
 
4913
@item VEC_last
4914
@itemx VEC_index
4915
Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
4916
 
4917
@item VEC_iterate
4918
Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
4919
traversed.
4920
 
4921
@item VEC_alloc
4922
@itemx VEC_free
4923
Create and destroy an array.
4924
 
4925
@item VEC_embedded_size
4926
@itemx VEC_embedded_init
4927
Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
4928
 
4929
@item VEC_copy
4930
Duplicate an array.
4931
 
4932
@item VEC_space
4933
Return the amount of free space in an array.
4934
 
4935
@item VEC_reserve
4936
Ensure a certain amount of free space.
4937
 
4938
@item VEC_quick_push
4939
@itemx VEC_safe_push
4940
Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
4941
sure that it is.
4942
 
4943
@item VEC_pop
4944
Remove the last item from an array.
4945
 
4946
@item VEC_truncate
4947
Remove several items from the end of an array.
4948
 
4949
@item VEC_safe_grow
4950
Add several items to the end of an array.
4951
 
4952
@item VEC_replace
4953
Overwrite an item in the array.
4954
 
4955
@item VEC_quick_insert
4956
@itemx VEC_safe_insert
4957
Insert an item into the middle of the array.  Either the space must
4958
already exist, or the space is created.
4959
 
4960
@item VEC_ordered_remove
4961
@itemx VEC_unordered_remove
4962
Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
4963
 
4964
@item VEC_block_remove
4965
Remove a set of items from the array.
4966
 
4967
@item VEC_address
4968
Provide the address of the first element.
4969
 
4970
@item VEC_lower_bound
4971
Binary search the array.
4972
 
4973
@end table
4974
 
4975
@section include
4976
 
4977
@node Coding
4978
 
4979
@chapter Coding
4980
 
4981
This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
4982
algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
4983
 
4984
@section Cleanups
4985
@cindex cleanups
4986
 
4987
Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
4988
later.
4989
 
4990
When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
4991
@code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
4992
the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup.  The
4993
cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
4994
and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
4995
is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
4996
cleanups.  Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
4997
created.
4998
 
4999
Syntax:
5000
 
5001
@table @code
5002
@item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5003
Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5004
 
5005
@findex make_cleanup
5006
@item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5007
Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5008
@var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later.  The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5009
handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5010
@code{discard_cleanups}.  Unless you are going to call
5011
@code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5012
from @code{make_cleanup}.
5013
 
5014
@findex do_cleanups
5015
@item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5016
Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5017
@code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5018
 
5019
@findex discard_cleanups
5020
@item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5021
Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5022
the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5023
@end table
5024
 
5025
Cleanups are implemented as a chain.  The handle returned by
5026
@code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5027
later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5028
performed).  E.g.:
5029
 
5030
@smallexample
5031
make_cleanup (a, 0);
5032
@{
5033
  struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5034
  make_cleanup (c, 0)
5035
  ...
5036
  do_cleanups (old);
5037
@}
5038
@end smallexample
5039
 
5040
@noindent
5041
will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}.  The
5042
cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5043
be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5044
 
5045
Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5046
Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5047
will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups.  This need leads
5048
to two common cleanup styles.
5049
 
5050
The first style is try/finally.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5051
@code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5052
code-block's cleanups are always performed.  For instance, the following
5053
code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5054
called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5055
@code{xfree} will always be called:
5056
 
5057
@smallexample
5058
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5059
data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5060
make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5061
... blah blah ...
5062
do_cleanups (old);
5063
@end smallexample
5064
 
5065
The second style is try/except.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5066
@code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5067
any created cleanups are not performed.  For instance, the following
5068
code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5069
an error:
5070
 
5071
@smallexample
5072
FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5073
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5074
... blah blah ...
5075
discard_cleanups (old);
5076
return file;
5077
@end smallexample
5078
 
5079
Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5080
that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''.  This
5081
means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5082
interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5083
functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5084
@samp{longjmp} instead).
5085
 
5086
@section Per-architecture module data
5087
@cindex per-architecture module data
5088
@cindex multi-arch data
5089
@cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5090
 
5091
The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5092
specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5093
architecture object.
5094
 
5095
A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5096
 
5097
@deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5098
@var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5099
per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5100
in as a parameter).  Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5101
architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5102
and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5103
@end deftypefun
5104
 
5105
@deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5106
@var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5107
per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}.  Since @var{post_init} is
5108
always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5109
initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5110
per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5111
other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5112
create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5113
@end deftypefun
5114
 
5115
These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5116
identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5117
 
5118
The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5119
 
5120
@deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5121
Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5122
@var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5123
or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5124
current value of the per-architecture data-pointer.  If the data
5125
pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5126
corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5127
@end deftypefun
5128
 
5129
The examples below assume the following definitions:
5130
 
5131
@smallexample
5132
struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5133
static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5134
@end smallexample
5135
 
5136
A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5137
per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method.  The module's
5138
per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5139
creation.
5140
 
5141
In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added.  An
5142
architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5143
from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5144
 
5145
@smallexample
5146
static void *
5147
nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5148
@{
5149
  struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5150
  return data;
5151
@}
5152
@end smallexample
5153
 
5154
@smallexample
5155
extern void
5156
set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5157
@{
5158
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5159
  data->total = nozel;
5160
@}
5161
@end smallexample
5162
 
5163
A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5164
using @code{post_init}.
5165
 
5166
In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5167
@code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5168
architecture.
5169
 
5170
@smallexample
5171
static void *
5172
nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5173
@{
5174
  struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5175
  nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5176
  return data;
5177
@}
5178
@end smallexample
5179
 
5180
@smallexample
5181
extern int
5182
nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5183
@{
5184
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5185
  return data->total;
5186
@}
5187
@end smallexample
5188
 
5189
@section Wrapping Output Lines
5190
@cindex line wrap in output
5191
 
5192
@findex wrap_here
5193
Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5194
or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5195
added in places that would be good breaking points.  The utility
5196
routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5197
exceeded.
5198
 
5199
The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5200
printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there.  This argument is saved
5201
away and used later.  It must remain valid until the next call to
5202
@code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5203
@code{*_filtered} functions.  Don't pass in a local variable and then
5204
return!
5205
 
5206
It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5207
space.  If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5208
indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5209
the line wraps there.
5210
 
5211
Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5212
finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5213
to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output.  Symbol reading routines that
5214
print warnings are a good example.
5215
 
5216
@section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5217
@cindex coding standards
5218
 
5219
@value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5220
@file{etc/standards.texi}.  This file is also available for anonymous
5221
FTP from GNU archive sites.  @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5222
of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5223
but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5224
 
5225
@value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5226
@value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5227
 
5228
 
5229
@subsection ISO C
5230
 
5231
@value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5232
compiler.
5233
 
5234
@value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5235
 
5236
 
5237
@subsection Memory Management
5238
 
5239
@value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5240
@code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5241
 
5242
@value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5243
@code{xcalloc} when allocating memory.  Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5244
these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty.  Instead,
5245
they unwind the stack using cleanups.  These functions return
5246
@code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5247
 
5248
@emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5249
memory allocation is removed.  These functions provide portable
5250
behavior.}
5251
 
5252
@value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5253
 
5254
@value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5255
memory pool.  Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5256
free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5257
 
5258
@emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5259
@code{NULL} pointer.}
5260
 
5261
@value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5262
allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5263
 
5264
@emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable.  Some systems
5265
restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5266
 
5267
@value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5268
function @code{xstrprintf}.
5269
 
5270
@emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail.  Print
5271
functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5272
errors.}
5273
 
5274
 
5275
@subsection Compiler Warnings
5276
@cindex compiler warnings
5277
 
5278
With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5279
@samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}.  The exceptions
5280
are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.  The default, when
5281
building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5282
 
5283
This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5284
with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags.  Any warnings
5285
from those flags are treated as errors.
5286
 
5287
The current list of warning flags includes:
5288
 
5289
@table @samp
5290
@item -Wall
5291
Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5292
 
5293
@item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5294
 
5295
@sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5296
code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5297
 
5298
@item -Wpointer-arith
5299
 
5300
@item -Wformat-nonliteral
5301
Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5302
might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5303
Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5304
@code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5305
but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5306
 
5307
@item -Wno-pointer-sign
5308
In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5309
assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5310
signedness.  However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5311
carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}.  In early 2006
5312
the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5313
worth the time it would take.
5314
 
5315
@item -Wno-unused-parameter
5316
Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5317
unused parameters.  Consequently this warning is avoided.  The macro
5318
@code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5319
it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5320
is being used.
5321
 
5322
@item -Wno-unused
5323
@itemx -Wno-switch
5324
@itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
5325
These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5326
currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5327
 
5328
@end table
5329
 
5330
@subsection Formatting
5331
 
5332
@cindex source code formatting
5333
The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5334
strictly.
5335
 
5336
A function declaration should not have its name in column zero.  A
5337
function definition should have its name in column zero.
5338
 
5339
@smallexample
5340
/* Declaration */
5341
static void foo (void);
5342
/* Definition */
5343
void
5344
foo (void)
5345
@{
5346
@}
5347
@end smallexample
5348
 
5349
@emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting.  Function definitions can
5350
be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5351
 
5352
There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5353
parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5354
required by C).  There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5355
or before a close paren/bracket.
5356
 
5357
While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5358
more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5359
after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5360
whitespace after the semicolon).  Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5361
for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5362
 
5363
Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5364
 
5365
@smallexample
5366
void *foo;
5367
@end smallexample
5368
 
5369
@noindent
5370
and not:
5371
 
5372
@smallexample
5373
void * foo;
5374
void* foo;
5375
@end smallexample
5376
 
5377
@subsection Comments
5378
 
5379
@cindex comment formatting
5380
The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5381
 
5382
Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5383
@code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5384
 
5385
@smallexample
5386
/* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger.  If inferior
5387
   gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5388
   returning.  That is why there is a loop in this function.  When
5389
   this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5390
   stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands.  */
5391
@end smallexample
5392
 
5393
(Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5394
comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5395
 
5396
Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5397
variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5398
 
5399
In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5400
than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5401
line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5402
than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5403
 
5404
@subsection C Usage
5405
 
5406
@cindex C data types
5407
Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5408
host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5409
of evaluation of expressions.
5410
 
5411
@cindex function usage
5412
Use functions freely.  There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5413
in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5414
call, mainly in symbol reading.  Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5415
limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5416
 
5417
However, use functions with moderation.  A thousand one-line functions
5418
are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5419
 
5420
@emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5421
(But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5422
protected with parentheses.)
5423
 
5424
@cindex types
5425
 
5426
Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5427
declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5428
 
5429
 
5430
@subsection Function Prototypes
5431
@cindex function prototypes
5432
 
5433
Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5434
a function.  Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5435
argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5436
function definition.
5437
 
5438
All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5439
callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5440
be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5441
visible to random source files.
5442
 
5443
Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5444
that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5445
 
5446
 
5447
@subsection Internal Error Recovery
5448
 
5449
During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5450
User errors and internal errors.  User errors include not only a user
5451
entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5452
object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5453
Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5454
run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5455
 
5456
When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5457
@code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5458
 
5459
@value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5460
 
5461
@emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function.  Either
5462
the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5463
@code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5464
error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5465
 
5466
@subsection File Names
5467
 
5468
Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5469
case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5470
unique.  These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5471
 
5472
@emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5473
platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS.  Every time an unfriendly file
5474
is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5475
@file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly.  Compare the
5476
convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5477
@file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5478
@file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5479
 
5480
Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5481
of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5482
 
5483
@emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5484
 
5485
When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5486
@file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5487
@file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}).  These headers should be relatively
5488
independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5489
the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5490
should refer only to system types.  They may be shared between multiple
5491
programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5492
 
5493
For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5494
 
5495
 
5496
@subsection Include Files
5497
 
5498
A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5499
 
5500
A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5501
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
5502
indirect inclusion.
5503
 
5504
A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5505
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
5506
indirect inclusion.  Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5507
be directly included.
5508
 
5509
An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5510
 
5511
An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5512
Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5513
pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5514
 
5515
A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5516
 
5517
An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5518
files.  Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5519
@code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5520
 
5521
All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5522
 
5523
@smallexample
5524
#ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5525
#define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5526
header body
5527
#endif
5528
@end smallexample
5529
 
5530
 
5531
@subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5532
 
5533
@cindex design
5534
In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5535
semantics.  Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5536
experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5537
trouble.
5538
 
5539
@cindex assumptions about targets
5540
You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5541
(including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions).  Such things
5542
must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5543
@value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5544
such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5545
 
5546
You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5547
the target system.  All references to the target must go through the
5548
current @code{target_ops} vector.
5549
 
5550
You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5551
(except in the ``native'' support modules).  In particular, you can't
5552
assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5553
host machine.  Target code must bring along its own header files --
5554
written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5555
copyright problems.
5556
 
5557
@cindex portability
5558
Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon.  It's much better
5559
to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5560
systems.
5561
 
5562
@cindex system dependencies
5563
New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5564
or operating systems are unacceptable.  All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5565
for features.  The information about which configurations contain which
5566
features should be segregated into the configuration files.  Experience
5567
has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5568
often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5569
predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5570
time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5571
with regard to this feature.
5572
 
5573
Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5574
target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5575
 
5576
@cindex portable file name handling
5577
@cindex file names, portability
5578
One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5579
creep in is handling of file names.  The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5580
assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5581
a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5582
directories, case-sensitive file names.  These assumptions are not
5583
necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows.  To avoid
5584
system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5585
name, use the following portable macros:
5586
 
5587
@table @code
5588
@findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5589
@item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5590
This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5591
whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family.  Use this
5592
symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5593
such hosts.
5594
 
5595
@findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5596
@item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5597
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5598
character.  On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5599
such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5600
pass.
5601
 
5602
@findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5603
@item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5604
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5605
For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5606
@file{/} is absolute.  On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5607
@file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5608
 
5609
@findex FILENAME_CMP
5610
@item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5611
Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5612
appropriate for the underlying host filesystem.  For Posix systems,
5613
this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5614
will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5615
 
5616
@findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5617
@item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5618
Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5619
@code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5620
This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5621
 
5622
@findex SLASH_STRING
5623
@item SLASH_STRING
5624
This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5625
absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5626
@code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5627
@code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5628
@end table
5629
 
5630
In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5631
functions whenever possible.  For example, to extract a directory or a
5632
basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5633
@code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5634
platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5635
with @code{strrchr}.
5636
 
5637
Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5638
attribute struct.  For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5639
multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5640
by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5641
well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references).  Whenever
5642
something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5643
using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5644
@code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5645
current target_ops structure.  In this way, when a new remote interface
5646
is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5647
implements the new remote interface.  Other examples of
5648
attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5649
formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5650
 
5651
Please avoid duplicating code.  For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5652
the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5653
@value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5654
something was very painful.  In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5655
consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}.  @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5656
with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5657
file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5658
radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5659
 
5660
All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5661
@var{module}} command.  Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5662
messages.  Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}.  Do not use
5663
@code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5664
 
5665
 
5666
@node Porting GDB
5667
 
5668
@chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5669
@cindex porting to new machines
5670
 
5671
Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5672
specifying the configuration of the machine.  This is done in a
5673
dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5674
hope to make more sensible soon.  Let's say your new host is called an
5675
@var{xyz} (e.g.,  @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5676
name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5677
@samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}).  In particular:
5678
 
5679
@itemize @bullet
5680
@item
5681
In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5682
@var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5683
vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file.  Also, add
5684
@var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5685
@code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}.  You can test your changes by
5686
running
5687
 
5688
@smallexample
5689
./config.sub @var{xyz}
5690
@end smallexample
5691
 
5692
@noindent
5693
and
5694
 
5695
@smallexample
5696
./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5697
@end smallexample
5698
 
5699
@noindent
5700
which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5701
and no error messages.
5702
 
5703
@noindent
5704
You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already.  Porting BFD is
5705
beyond the scope of this manual.
5706
 
5707
@item
5708
To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
5709
your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
5710
desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
5711
setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
5712
@var{xyz}).
5713
 
5714
@emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress.  The file
5715
@file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
5716
new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
5717
Recent changes have removed this requirement.  The file now only needs
5718
to be modified when adding a new native configuration.  This will likely
5719
changed again in the future.}
5720
 
5721
@item
5722
Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
5723
target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
5724
configuration.
5725
@end itemize
5726
 
5727
@node Versions and Branches
5728
@chapter Versions and Branches
5729
 
5730
@section Versions
5731
 
5732
@value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
5733
@file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
5734
 
5735
@table @asis
5736
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}
5737
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
5738
an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
5739
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5740
a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
5741
6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
5742
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
5743
a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
5744
6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
5745
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
5746
a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
5747
@var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
5748
may include additional changes
5749
@end table
5750
 
5751
@value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
5752
numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
5753
of 50.  At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
5754
@var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
5755
 
5756
@value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar.  When the branch is cut, the
5757
@var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90.  As draft releases are
5758
drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented.  Once the
5759
first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
5760
@var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
5761
@var{patchlevel}.
5762
 
5763
For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
5764
identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
5765
 
5766
@table @asis
5767
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5768
drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
5769
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5770
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5771
drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
5772
6.1.90.20020304)
5773
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5774
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5775
drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
5776
@end table
5777
 
5778
If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
5779
6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
5780
here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
5781
 
5782
@smallexample
5783
     <HEAD>
5784
        |
5785
6.1.50.20020302-cvs
5786
        |
5787
        +--------------------------.
5788
        |                    <gdb_6_2-branch>
5789
        |                          |
5790
6.2.50.20020303-cvs        6.1.90 (draft #1)
5791
        |                          |
5792
6.2.50.20020304-cvs        6.1.90.20020304-cvs
5793
        |                          |
5794
6.2.50.20020305-cvs        6.1.91 (draft #2)
5795
        |                          |
5796
6.2.50.20020306-cvs        6.1.91.20020306-cvs
5797
        |                          |
5798
6.2.50.20020307-cvs        6.2 (release)
5799
        |                          |
5800
6.2.50.20020308-cvs        6.2.0.20020308-cvs
5801
        |                          |
5802
6.2.50.20020309-cvs        6.2.1 (update)
5803
        |                          |
5804
6.2.50.20020310-cvs         <branch closed>
5805
        |
5806
6.2.50.20020311-cvs
5807
        |
5808
        +--------------------------.
5809
        |                     <gdb_6_3-branch>
5810
        |                          |
5811
6.3.50.20020312-cvs        6.2.90 (draft #1)
5812
        |                          |
5813
@end smallexample
5814
 
5815
@section Release Branches
5816
@cindex Release Branches
5817
 
5818
@value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
5819
single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
5820
branch tags:
5821
 
5822
@smallexample
5823
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
5824
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
5825
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
5826
@end smallexample
5827
 
5828
@emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
5829
release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
5830
date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag.  The
5831
branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
5832
 
5833
@section Vendor Branches
5834
@cindex vendor branches
5835
 
5836
To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
5837
@file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
5838
(an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
5839
its version identifier).  E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
5840
Inc Patch 2)}.
5841
 
5842
@section Experimental Branches
5843
@cindex experimental branches
5844
 
5845
@subsection Guidelines
5846
 
5847
@value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
5848
repository, for experimental development.  Branches make it possible
5849
for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
5850
significant new developments.
5851
 
5852
The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
5853
 
5854
@table @emph
5855
 
5856
@item a branch has an owner
5857
The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
5858
ground rules.  In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
5859
adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
5860
 
5861
@item all commits are posted
5862
All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
5863
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
5864
mailing list}.  While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
5865
should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
5866
 
5867
@item all commits are covered by an assignment
5868
This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
5869
and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
5870
 
5871
@item a branch is focused
5872
A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
5873
unnecessary or irrelevant changes.  Cleanups, where identified, being
5874
be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
5875
 
5876
@item a branch tracks mainline
5877
This keeps the level of divergence under control.  It also keeps the
5878
pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
5879
mainline.
5880
 
5881
@item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
5882
The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
5883
branch (branches of individual files should be avoided).  @xref{Tags}.
5884
 
5885
@item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
5886
The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
5887
the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
5888
@samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
5889
 
5890
@end table
5891
 
5892
@subsection Tags
5893
@anchor{Tags}
5894
 
5895
To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
5896
branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
5897
 
5898
@table @code
5899
 
5900
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5901
@itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
5902
The branch point and corresponding branch tag.  @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
5903
date that the branch was created.  A branch is created using the
5904
sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
5905
@smallexample
5906
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
5907
cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
5908
   @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
5909
@end smallexample
5910
 
5911
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5912
The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
5913
on @var{yyyymmdd}.  To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
5914
use a command sequence like:
5915
@smallexample
5916
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
5917
cvs update \
5918
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
5919
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
5920
@end smallexample
5921
@noindent
5922
Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
5923
merge.
5924
 
5925
@end table
5926
 
5927
@noindent
5928
For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
5929
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
5930
 
5931
@node Start of New Year Procedure
5932
@chapter Start of New Year Procedure
5933
@cindex new year procedure
5934
 
5935
At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
5936
 
5937
@itemize @bullet
5938
@item
5939
Rotate the ChangeLog file
5940
 
5941
The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
5942
@file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
5943
A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
5944
contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog.  The following should
5945
also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
5946
the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
5947
@smallexample
5948
Local Variables:
5949
mode: change-log
5950
left-margin: 8
5951
fill-column: 74
5952
version-control: never
5953
End:
5954
@end smallexample
5955
 
5956
@item
5957
Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
5958
in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5959
 
5960
@item
5961
Update the copyright year in the startup message
5962
 
5963
Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
5964
@code{print_gdb_version}.
5965
 
5966
@item
5967
Add the new year in the copyright notices of all source and documentation
5968
files.  This can be done semi-automatically by running the @code{copyright.sh}
5969
script.  This script requires Emacs 22 or later to be installed.
5970
 
5971
@end itemize
5972
 
5973
@node Releasing GDB
5974
 
5975
@chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
5976
@cindex making a new release of gdb
5977
 
5978
@section Branch Commit Policy
5979
 
5980
The branch commit policy is pretty slack.  @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
5981
5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
5982
 
5983
@itemize @bullet
5984
@item
5985
The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
5986
@item
5987
Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
5988
trunk.  If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
5989
file is better than committing a hack.
5990
@item
5991
When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
5992
Does it fix a build?  Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
5993
when debugging a static binary?
5994
@item
5995
The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
5996
the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
5997
@item
5998
Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
5999
sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6000
@file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6001
@end itemize
6002
 
6003
@emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6004
functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6005
This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6006
reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6007
 
6008
 
6009
@section Obsoleting code
6010
 
6011
Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6012
code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6013
(an old target, an unused file).
6014
 
6015
Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6016
line.  Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6017
been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6018
 
6019
The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6020
wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6021
Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6022
 
6023
@enumerate
6024
@item
6025
Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6026
list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6027
recommended.
6028
@item
6029
Wait a week or so.
6030
@item
6031
Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6032
Announcement mailing list}.
6033
@item
6034
Wait a week or so.
6035
@item
6036
Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6037
prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6038
@item
6039
Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6040
released.
6041
@item
6042
Remove the obsolete code.
6043
@end enumerate
6044
 
6045
@noindent
6046
@emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6047
hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development.  Firstly it
6048
helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6049
or simply wrong.  Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6050
the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6051
hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6052
 
6053
 
6054
 
6055
@section Before the Branch
6056
 
6057
The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6058
changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created.  For
6059
instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6060
building.  If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6061
@file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6062
 
6063
@subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6064
 
6065
People always forget.  Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6066
something interesting happened add it yourself.  The @code{schedule}
6067
script will mention this in its e-mail.
6068
 
6069
@subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6070
 
6071
Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6072
@file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved.  The
6073
@code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6074
 
6075
@subheading Refresh any imported files.
6076
 
6077
A number of files are taken from external repositories.  They include:
6078
 
6079
@itemize @bullet
6080
@item
6081
@file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6082
@item
6083
@file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6084
file)
6085
@item
6086
@file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6087
@end itemize
6088
 
6089
@subheading Check the ARI
6090
 
6091
@uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6092
(Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6093
conventions.  The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6094
of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems.  There shouldn't be any
6095
regressions.
6096
 
6097
@subsection Review the bug data base
6098
 
6099
Close anything obviously fixed.
6100
 
6101
@subsection Check all cross targets build
6102
 
6103
The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6104
 
6105
 
6106
@section Cut the Branch
6107
 
6108
@subheading Create the branch
6109
 
6110
@smallexample
6111
$  u=5.1
6112
$  v=5.2
6113
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6114
$  D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6115
$  echo $u $V $D
6116
5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6117
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6118
-D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6119
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6120
-D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6121
$  ^echo ^^
6122
...
6123
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6124
-b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6125
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6126
-b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6127
$  ^echo ^^
6128
...
6129
$
6130
@end smallexample
6131
 
6132
@itemize @bullet
6133
@item
6134
By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6135
date/time.
6136
@item
6137
The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6138
@item
6139
Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6140
@item
6141
@file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6142
@item
6143
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6144
@end itemize
6145
 
6146
@subheading Update @file{version.in}
6147
 
6148
@smallexample
6149
$  u=5.1
6150
$  v=5.2
6151
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6152
$  echo $u $v$V
6153
5.1 5_2
6154
$  cd /tmp
6155
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6156
-r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6157
cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6158
 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6159
$  ^echo ^^
6160
U src/gdb/version.in
6161
$  cd src/gdb
6162
$  echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6163
$  cat version.in
6164
5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6165
$  cvs -f commit version.in
6166
@end smallexample
6167
 
6168
@itemize @bullet
6169
@item
6170
@file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6171
mechanism.
6172
@item
6173
@file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6174
initial branch version number.
6175
@end itemize
6176
 
6177
 
6178
@subheading Update the web and news pages
6179
 
6180
Something?
6181
 
6182
@subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6183
 
6184
The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6185
This file needs to be updated so that:
6186
 
6187
@itemize @bullet
6188
@item
6189
A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6190
@item
6191
The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6192
@end itemize
6193
 
6194
@noindent
6195
See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6196
cron table.
6197
 
6198
The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6199
any changes.  That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6200
snapshot directories.
6201
 
6202
 
6203
@subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6204
 
6205
The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6206
to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6207
refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6208
 
6209
The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6210
current release.
6211
 
6212
@subheading Post the branch info
6213
 
6214
Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6215
 
6216
@itemize @bullet
6217
@item
6218
@email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6219
@item
6220
@email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6221
@email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6222
@end itemize
6223
 
6224
@emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6225
ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6226
list are alerted.}
6227
 
6228
The announcement should include:
6229
 
6230
@itemize @bullet
6231
@item
6232
The branch tag.
6233
@item
6234
How to check out the branch using CVS.
6235
@item
6236
The date/number of weeks until the release.
6237
@item
6238
The branch commit policy still holds.
6239
@end itemize
6240
 
6241
@section Stabilize the branch
6242
 
6243
Something goes here.
6244
 
6245
@section Create a Release
6246
 
6247
The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6248
down into a number of stages.  The first part addresses the technical
6249
process of creating a releasable tar ball.  The later stages address the
6250
process of releasing that tar ball.
6251
 
6252
When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6253
 
6254
@subsection Create a release candidate
6255
 
6256
The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6257
made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6258
candidate).
6259
 
6260
@subsubheading Freeze the branch
6261
 
6262
Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6263
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6264
 
6265
@subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6266
 
6267
@smallexample
6268
$  b=gdb_5_2-branch
6269
$  v=5.2
6270
$  t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6271
$  echo $t/$b/$v
6272
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6273
$  mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6274
$  cd $t/$b/$v
6275
$  pwd
6276
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6277
$  which autoconf
6278
/home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6279
$
6280
@end smallexample
6281
 
6282
@noindent
6283
Notes:
6284
 
6285
@itemize @bullet
6286
@item
6287
Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully.  You want to be using the
6288
version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6289
found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6290
unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6291
@file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6292
@end itemize
6293
 
6294
@subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6295
 
6296
@smallexample
6297
$  for m in gdb insight
6298
do
6299
( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6300
done
6301
$
6302
@end smallexample
6303
 
6304
@noindent
6305
Note:
6306
 
6307
@itemize @bullet
6308
@item
6309
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6310
any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6311
@code{cvs} really does.
6312
@end itemize
6313
 
6314
@subsubheading Update relevant files.
6315
 
6316
@table @file
6317
 
6318
@item gdb/NEWS
6319
 
6320
Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline.  Minor
6321
releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6322
 
6323
Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6324
 
6325
@smallexample
6326
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6327
...
6328
c-x 4 a
6329
...
6330
c-x c-s c-x c-c
6331
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6332
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6333
@end smallexample
6334
 
6335
@item gdb/README
6336
 
6337
You'll need to update:
6338
 
6339
@itemize @bullet
6340
@item
6341
The version.
6342
@item
6343
The update date.
6344
@item
6345
Who did it.
6346
@end itemize
6347
 
6348
@smallexample
6349
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6350
...
6351
c-x 4 a
6352
...
6353
c-x c-s c-x c-c
6354
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6355
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6356
@end smallexample
6357
 
6358
@emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6359
before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6360
to get it updated.}
6361
 
6362
@emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6363
@file{INSTALL} from the core documentation.  This might be worth
6364
pursuing.}
6365
 
6366
@item gdb/version.in
6367
 
6368
@smallexample
6369
$  echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6370
$  cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6371
5.2
6372
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6373
...
6374
c-x 4 a
6375
... Bump to version ...
6376
c-x c-s c-x c-c
6377
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6378
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6379
@end smallexample
6380
 
6381
@end table
6382
 
6383
@subsubheading Do the dirty work
6384
 
6385
This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6386
 
6387
@smallexample
6388
$  for m in gdb insight
6389
do
6390
( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6391
done
6392
@end smallexample
6393
 
6394
If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6395
(@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6396
 
6397
@smallexample
6398
$  for m in gdb insight
6399
do
6400
( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6401
done
6402
@end smallexample
6403
 
6404
@subsubheading Check the source files
6405
 
6406
You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6407
@kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't.  Watch out
6408
for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6409
 
6410
@smallexample
6411
$  ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6412
M djunpack.bat
6413
? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6414
? proto-toplev
6415
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6416
M gdb/ChangeLog
6417
M gdb/NEWS
6418
M gdb/README
6419
M gdb/version.in
6420
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6421
$
6422
@end smallexample
6423
 
6424
@noindent
6425
@emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6426
@file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}.  They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6427
was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6428
didn't get suppressed).  Fixing it would be nice though.}
6429
 
6430
@subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6431
 
6432
@smallexample
6433
$  cp */src/*.tar .
6434
$  cp */src/*.bz2 .
6435
$  ls -F
6436
gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6437
$  for m in gdb insight
6438
do
6439
bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6440
gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6441
done
6442
$
6443
@end smallexample
6444
 
6445
@noindent
6446
Note:
6447
 
6448
@itemize @bullet
6449
@item
6450
A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6451
in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6452
can not include it in the compressed file.  This is also why the release
6453
process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6454
@end itemize
6455
 
6456
@subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6457
 
6458
Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6459
 
6460
@smallexample
6461
$  bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6462
$  cd gdb-5.2
6463
$  ./configure
6464
$  make
6465
@dots{}
6466
$  ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6467
GNU gdb 5.2
6468
@dots{}
6469
(gdb)  b main
6470
Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6471
(gdb)  run
6472
Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6473
 
6474
Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6475
734       catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6476
(gdb)  print args
6477
$1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6478
(gdb)
6479
@end smallexample
6480
 
6481
@subsection Make a release candidate available
6482
 
6483
If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6484
 
6485
@enumerate
6486
@item
6487
Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6488
@item
6489
Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6490
@var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6491
process can restart.
6492
@item
6493
Make the release candidate available in
6494
@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6495
@item
6496
Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6497
@email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6498
@end enumerate
6499
 
6500
@subsection Make a formal release available
6501
 
6502
(And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6503
 
6504
@subsubheading Install on sware
6505
 
6506
Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6507
 
6508
@smallexample
6509
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6510
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6511
@end smallexample
6512
 
6513
@noindent
6514
Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6515
are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6516
 
6517
@smallexample
6518
$  cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6519
$  rm @dots{}
6520
@end smallexample
6521
 
6522
@noindent
6523
Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6524
directory:
6525
 
6526
@smallexample
6527
$  vi README
6528
@dots{}
6529
$  rm -f .message
6530
$  ln README .message
6531
@end smallexample
6532
 
6533
@subsubheading Update the web pages.
6534
 
6535
@table @file
6536
 
6537
@item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6538
This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6539
@itemize @bullet
6540
@item
6541
General announcement.
6542
@item
6543
News.  If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6544
earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6545
@item
6546
Errata.
6547
@end itemize
6548
 
6549
@item htdocs/index.html
6550
@itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6551
@itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6552
These files include:
6553
@itemize @bullet
6554
@item
6555
Announcement of the most recent release.
6556
@item
6557
News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6558
@end itemize
6559
These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6560
 
6561
@item download/onlinedocs/
6562
You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6563
docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}.  The best way is to look in the output
6564
from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6565
Something like:
6566
 
6567
@smallexample
6568
$  ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6569
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6570
 $PWD/www \
6571
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6572
 gdb
6573
@end smallexample
6574
 
6575
@item download/ari/
6576
Just like the online documentation.  Something like:
6577
 
6578
@smallexample
6579
$  /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6580
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6581
 $PWD/www \
6582
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6583
 gdb
6584
@end smallexample
6585
 
6586
@end table
6587
 
6588
@subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6589
 
6590
Something goes here.
6591
 
6592
 
6593
@subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6594
 
6595
At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6596
@file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6597
 
6598
@subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6599
 
6600
Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6601
 
6602
@itemize @bullet
6603
@item
6604
@email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6605
@item
6606
@email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6607
day or so to let things get out)
6608
@item
6609
@email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6610
@end itemize
6611
 
6612
@subsection Cleanup
6613
 
6614
The release is out but you're still not finished.
6615
 
6616
@subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6617
 
6618
In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6619
 
6620
@itemize @bullet
6621
@item
6622
@file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6623
@item
6624
@file{gdb/version.in}
6625
@item
6626
@file{gdb/NEWS}
6627
@item
6628
@file{gdb/README}
6629
@end itemize
6630
 
6631
@subsubheading Tag the release
6632
 
6633
Something like:
6634
 
6635
@smallexample
6636
$  d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6637
$  echo $d
6638
2002-01-24
6639
$  ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6640
$  ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6641
@end smallexample
6642
 
6643
Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6644
@value{GDBN}.
6645
 
6646
@subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6647
 
6648
Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6649
indicates when the release was made.
6650
 
6651
@subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6652
 
6653
If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6654
@kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it.  Having
6655
committed all the release changes it can be set to
6656
@file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6657
is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6658
 
6659
Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6660
 
6661
@subsubheading Merge into trunk
6662
 
6663
The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6664
trunk.
6665
 
6666
@subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6667
 
6668
Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6669
Discussion List} with an updated announcement.  The schedule can be
6670
generated by running:
6671
 
6672
@smallexample
6673
$  ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6674
@end smallexample
6675
 
6676
@noindent
6677
The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6678
of the most recent release.
6679
 
6680
Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6681
 
6682
@section Post release
6683
 
6684
Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6685
 
6686
@node Testsuite
6687
 
6688
@chapter Testsuite
6689
@cindex test suite
6690
 
6691
The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6692
While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6693
this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6694
the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
6695
to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
6696
 
6697
The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework.  The
6698
tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
6699
runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
6700
 
6701
@section Using the Testsuite
6702
 
6703
@cindex running the test suite
6704
To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
6705
testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}.  This just sets up some
6706
environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script.  While
6707
the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
6708
and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails.  When the testsuite is
6709
finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
6710
 
6711
@smallexample
6712
                === gdb Summary ===
6713
 
6714
# of expected passes            6016
6715
# of unexpected failures        58
6716
# of unexpected successes       5
6717
# of expected failures          183
6718
# of unresolved testcases       3
6719
# of untested testcases         5
6720
@end smallexample
6721
 
6722
To run a specific test script, type:
6723
@example
6724
make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
6725
@end example
6726
where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
6727
spaces.
6728
 
6729
The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
6730
conspires to keep us from this ideal.  Unexpected failures indicate
6731
real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite.  Expected
6732
failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
6733
hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
6734
everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
6735
being fixed in the near future.  Expected failures should not be added
6736
lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
6737
Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
6738
reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
6739
catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
6740
program.
6741
 
6742
When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
6743
testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
6744
regressions.  Note that truly complete testing would require that you
6745
run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
6746
compilers; however this is more than really necessary.  In many cases
6747
testing with a single configuration is sufficient.  Other useful
6748
options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
6749
host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
6750
mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
6751
 
6752
If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
6753
tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
6754
and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
6755
Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
6756
failure, please add a test case for it.  Some cases are extremely
6757
difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
6758
in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
6759
tests for all of those.
6760
 
6761
DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines.  However,
6762
some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
6763
the host machine are not the same.  In such an environment, these scripts
6764
will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
6765
 
6766
@smallexample
6767
UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
6768
@end smallexample
6769
 
6770
@section Testsuite Organization
6771
 
6772
@cindex test suite organization
6773
The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}.  While the
6774
testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
6775
and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
6776
handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run.  The file
6777
@file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
6778
all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
6779
configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
6780
definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
6781
 
6782
The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
6783
subdirectories of those.  The names of the test files must always end
6784
with @file{.exp}.  DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
6785
in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
6786
get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
6787
 
6788
The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
6789
are for.  Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
6790
located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
6791
execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
6792
intelligibility.
6793
 
6794
@table @file
6795
@item gdb.base
6796
This is the base testsuite.  The tests in it should apply to all
6797
configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
6798
The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
6799
ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
6800
for prototypes).
6801
 
6802
@item gdb.@var{lang}
6803
Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C.  Examples are
6804
@file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
6805
 
6806
@item gdb.@var{platform}
6807
Non-portable tests.  The tests are specific to a specific configuration
6808
(host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos.  Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
6809
HP-UX.
6810
 
6811
@item gdb.@var{compiler}
6812
Tests specific to a particular compiler.  As of this writing (June
6813
1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
6814
couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
6815
imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
6816
extensions.
6817
 
6818
@item gdb.@var{subsystem}
6819
Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth.  For
6820
instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
6821
@file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
6822
@end table
6823
 
6824
@section Writing Tests
6825
@cindex writing tests
6826
 
6827
In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
6828
should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
6829
 
6830
You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
6831
includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
6832
However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
6833
instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
6834
calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
6835
 
6836
Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
6837
necessary.  Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
6838
a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}.  Like @code{gdb_test},
6839
@code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
6840
prompts.
6841
 
6842
Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
6843
On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
6844
spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
6845
 
6846
The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
6847
style.  Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
6848
styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
6849
instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
6850
never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
6851
uniformly.
6852
 
6853
@node Hints
6854
 
6855
@chapter Hints
6856
 
6857
Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
6858
appear anywhere else in the directory.
6859
 
6860
@menu
6861
* Getting Started::             Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
6862
* Debugging GDB::               Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6863
@end menu
6864
 
6865
@node Getting Started,,, Hints
6866
 
6867
@section Getting Started
6868
 
6869
@value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
6870
work on it, it can be hard to know where to start.  Fortunately, if you
6871
know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
6872
 
6873
This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
6874
generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
6875
 
6876
Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
6877
comments with those functions or data structures.  If you run across a
6878
function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
6879
explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
6880
free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
6881
out what the comment should say.  If you find a comment which is
6882
actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
6883
 
6884
Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
6885
native dependent files can be in several places.  Sometimes they are
6886
repeated every place the macro is defined.  Sometimes they are where the
6887
macro is used.  Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
6888
default definition of the macro, and the comment is there.  This manual
6889
also documents all the available macros.
6890
@c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
6891
@c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
6892
@c Conditionals})
6893
 
6894
Start with the header files.  Once you have some idea of how
6895
@value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
6896
@file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
6897
code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
6898
 
6899
You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
6900
enhance your understanding of it.  Summarize it, translate it to another
6901
language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
6902
the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
6903
and verify your prediction, etc.  If you are reading code and your eyes
6904
are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
6905
approach.
6906
 
6907
Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
6908
specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
6909
function with the @code{next} command.  Do not use @code{step} or you
6910
will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
6911
calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
6912
(perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
6913
called) of what it does.  This way you can identify which of the
6914
functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
6915
one which you are interested in.  You may need to examine the data
6916
structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
6917
the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
6918
look like.
6919
 
6920
Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
6921
code, rather than actually stepping through it.  The same general
6922
principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
6923
else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
6924
rather than worrying about all its details.
6925
 
6926
@cindex command implementation
6927
A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
6928
a command which invokes that feature.  Suppose you want to know how
6929
single-stepping works.  As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
6930
@code{step} command invokes single-stepping.  The command is invoked
6931
via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
6932
which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
6933
the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
6934
@code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}.  For example, the @code{step}
6935
command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
6936
display} command invokes @code{display_info}.  When this convention is
6937
not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
6938
tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
6939
breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
6940
 
6941
@cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
6942
If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
6943
on @code{bug-gdb}.  But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
6944
wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
6945
@value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
6946
Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
6947
 
6948
@node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
6949
 
6950
@section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
6951
@cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
6952
 
6953
If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
6954
fully functional.  Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
6955
Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
6956
debugged in another.  Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
6957
./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
6958
@file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
6959
 
6960
When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
6961
@file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
6962
gdb easier.  The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
6963
in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
6964
gdb.  See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
6965
 
6966
If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
6967
you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
6968
routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
6969
@kbd{M-.}
6970
 
6971
Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
6972
have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
6973
 
6974
@section Submitting Patches
6975
 
6976
@cindex submitting patches
6977
Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
6978
@value{GDBN} users.  In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
6979
Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
6980
changes.
6981
 
6982
The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
6983
This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
6984
 
6985
If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
6986
or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
6987
with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
6988
 
6989
@cindex legal papers for code contributions
6990
The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
6991
copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
6992
of the changes to the Free Software Foundation.  You can get the
6993
standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
6994
and asking for it.  We recommend that people write in "All programs
6995
owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
6996
changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
6997
etc) can be
6998
contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
6999
bureaucracy and filed with the FSF.  We can't start merging changes until
7000
this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7001
since we maintain it for them).
7002
 
7003
Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7004
feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7005
Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7006
header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7007
each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7008
needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7009
@file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}).  If there are a lot of changes for a
7010
single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7011
 
7012
In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7013
sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7014
If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one.  If you leave
7015
out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting.  Etc., etc.
7016
 
7017
The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7018
install some of the changes.  They'll be returned to you with questions
7019
or comments.  If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7020
will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7021
The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7022
the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7023
being reworked.  If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7024
tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7025
the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7026
acceptable.
7027
 
7028
If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is.  But we get a lot
7029
of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7030
installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7031
reporter or the contributor could have done.  Patches that arrive
7032
complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7033
they arrive.  The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7034
permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7035
be for quite some time.
7036
 
7037
Please send patches directly to
7038
@email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7039
 
7040
@section Obsolete Conditionals
7041
@cindex obsolete code
7042
 
7043
Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7044
configuration macros.  They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7045
should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7046
 
7047
@table @code
7048
@item STACK_END_ADDR
7049
This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7050
in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7051
core file itself.  This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7052
gets the info portably from there.  The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7053
files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7054
and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7055
 
7056
Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7057
is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD.  Now that's old!
7058
 
7059
@end table
7060
 
7061
@section Build Script
7062
 
7063
@cindex build script
7064
 
7065
The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
7066
@option{--enable-targets=all} set.  This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
7067
targets activated.  This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
7068
affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
7069
@file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
7070
 
7071
After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
7072
supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
7073
information about the architecture.  The test results are stored in log files
7074
in the directory the script was called from.
7075
 
7076
@include observer.texi
7077
@raisesections
7078
@include fdl.texi
7079
@lowersections
7080
 
7081
@node Index
7082
@unnumbered Index
7083
 
7084
@printindex cp
7085
 
7086
@bye

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.